JP6381560B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of such gaming machines can adjust the effect (volume, brightness, etc.) during execution of variable display by the player's operation (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-104089 A

  However, as described in Patent Document 1, in a configuration in which the effect can be adjusted even during execution of variable display, when the adjustment image is displayed according to the player's operation, the variable display is derived and displayed. The recognizability of the display result may be reduced.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the recognizability of a display result of a variable display that is derived and displayed.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing variable display and deriving and displaying a display result of a variable table, and is an electrical component (for example, light emitting) Control means for controlling a plurality of light emitters constituting the body units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the operation motors 60A to 60C for operating the movable members 51 to 54) For example, a specific signal (for example, from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electrical component in accordance with a serial communication system control signal from the control microcomputer 120) and the control means. Output means (for example, light emitter driver 411, motor drive driver 412, light emitter drivers 413a to 413c), At least during the execution of variable display, adjustment means (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the processing of steps S706 and S707) that can adjust the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player Adjustment image display means (for example, steps S708, S703, etc.) for displaying an adjustment image (for example, adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 35B to 35D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period (for example, predetermined period T1). And the output means has a stop function to stop the output of the specific signal after the elapse of a specific period from the input of the control signal. enable or are can be disabled, the output state when outputting a control signal input to the other output means, the predetermined manner A first output state in which the waveform rises (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 14 (1))) and a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state (for example, The output state can be set to any one of a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 14 (2)) (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), a normal slew rate output can be set). If the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (see FIG. 13). The adjustment image display means is a case where the display result of variable display is derived and displayed within a predetermined period. Further, in the predetermined period, the adjustment image cannot be visually recognized in the period in which the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (for example, the derived display period T2) (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs stepping). It is characterized in that the processing of S710 to S712 is executed) or that it is difficult to view (for example, the adjustment image is displayed in a semi-transparent display or blinking). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.
Moreover, you may be comprised so that the control signal continuation means for outputting a control signal continuously may be provided.

(Means 2) The means 1 may be configured such that at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the display result of the variable display (see, for example, FIG. 25A). Good. According to such a configuration, the adjustment image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the display result of the variable display is erased, so that a reduction in the visibility of the display result of the variable display can be suppressed.

(Means 3) The means 1 or 2 may be configured such that the error image is not erased even during the derivation display of the display result of the variable display (see, for example, FIG. 25 (D2)). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, priority is given to the display of the error image over the display of the adjusted image (for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 that has received the abnormality notification command in the process of step S57). The CPU 130 may be configured to continue displaying the error image as shown in FIGS. 25D1 and 25D until the error indicated by the command is resolved. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, when the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is kept visible (for example, see FIG. 25B), but the menu display operation is performed. In this case, the demonstration display may be deleted (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662). According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a determining means (for example, the process of step S239) is executed for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state). Display means (for example, steps S325, S348, etc.) that performs variable display of identification information and derives and displays the display result of variable display of identification information in accordance with the determination result of the determination means. The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the process of S350) and the specific effect execution means that can display the specific effect image during execution of the variable display of the identification information (for example, the character display process for change effect in step S162). CPU 130 of the production control microcomputer 120 to be executed) The effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 23B), and the specific effect execution means derives the display result of the variable display of the identification information. The display mode of the specific effect image is set to a static mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information during the period (for example, a portion where the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes the process of step S609). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, erroneous recognition of the display result can be prevented.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the output means is connected in parallel from specific signal output units (for example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped in a plurality of different groups. A specific signal (for example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) according to a communication method is output (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In addition, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group.) From the specific signal output unit The output timing of the specific signal is different for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. Child Q0～Q23, the output timing of the output signal may be configured to be distributed are) as each group from Q0～Q11. According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(Means 8) The means 7 includes movable members (for example, movable members 51 to 54) that perform operations, and drive means (for example, operation motors 60A to 60C) that operate the movable members are included in the same group of output means. Driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 18, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the output means has a stop function (for example, time-out) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the control signal was input. (For example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 13). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

(Means 10) In the means 9, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 120 is provided in the production control process (see step S65) at least for a predetermined period (this example). In this case, by repeatedly outputting a control signal every second), the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is continuously executed. Or the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C may be continuously performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

(Means 11) In the means 9 or 10, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to the invalid state, By setting the T terminal to H (high), the time-out function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 13). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stopping function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where a several movable member will be in the advance state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a production | presentation movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED9a, left frame LED9b, and right frame LED9c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input-output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding display data memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding display change effect and display change presence / absence. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of a hold display change pattern and a change production timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a change production timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a change production timing pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character display process for a change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an adjustment result image. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of change production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an icon display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a determination of an icon display change pattern. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of an operation promotion production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation promotion effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each production.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In addition, in FIG. 1, the effect movable mechanism 50 mentioned later is shown with the broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A main image display device 5MA is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The main image display device 5MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 5MA, it corresponds to variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A and variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B in the special figure game. Thus, for example, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be individually identified are variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 5MA, the decorative symbols corresponding to each are variably displayed. In this case, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. , Variation of the decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronism with the special game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, etc., and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed for a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

  On the screen of the main image display device 5MA, a first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HR displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HL displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game has not yet been established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). If the first special figure reservation storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first start winning is based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed.

  In the first hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value “4” of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR, the hold on the first hold display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR, a new first hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HR, when a special game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HR While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A that has not yet started.

  The second hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved storage number, and the reserved numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the right end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL, the second hold display part 5HL holds it. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, a new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HL, and when the special figure game using the second special view is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HL While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area. In this way, the second hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B that has not yet started.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display section AHA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display compatible display, digestion display, or current display). In the active display portion AHA, for example, the first erased (digested) first in the first hold display portion 5HR in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. An active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. Further, in the active display part AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is established, the active display part AHA is erased (digested) in the second holding storage part 5HL. An active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be. However, the display mode of the active display in this embodiment may change to a display mode different from the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. In this way, the active display unit AHA is executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. During the execution, the correspondence display corresponding to the special game is configured to be executable.

  In the display area of the main image display device 5MA shown in FIG. 1, an active display portion AHA is disposed between the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the main image display device 5MA. It only has to be done. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL may be replaced with each other.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL, or instead of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  On the screen of the main image display device 5MA, a small symbol display area 5V smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is provided. On the screen of the main image display device 5MA shown in FIG. 1, a small symbol display area 5V is provided in the upper left part. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. The effect image indicating the small symbol is also referred to as a notification information image. Accordingly, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, a variable display of the effect image indicating the small symbol serving as the notification information image is performed, and the effect image indicating the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result. Is derived.

  Thus, on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, variable display of small symbols different from the decorative symbols is performed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the finalized decorative symbol that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small symbols continues to be performed in a certain display mode and disappears from the screen or is blocked. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V are always referred to as small symbols or effect small symbols. In the small symbol display area 5V, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is a part of or all of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol indicating a number similar to a portion indicating a number in a decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbols may be variably displayed as the notification information image.

  In addition, a 4th symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and further the normal symbol, and the variable display of the 4th symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. For example, the variable display of the 4th symbol is displayed and non-displayed with a specific display color (for example, blue) at a certain time interval in the 4th symbol display area provided on the screen of the main image display device 5MA or outside the screen. This is realized by continuing display control that repeats display. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the 4th symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the display screen of the main image display device 5MA, for example, on the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. Is provided. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who is paying attention to the display effect on the main image display device 5MA to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special symbol can be variably displayed. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by variably displaying small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the main image display device 5MA and deriving a display result, whether or not variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  On the right side of the main image display device 5MA, a sub image display device 5SU for displaying various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 5MA. The installation location of the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 2, for example, the main image display apparatus 5MA is installed near the center of the game area, The sub image display device 5SU may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as outside the gaming area or at the upper front, lower front, and front side of the gaming machine frame 3.

  Below the main image display device 5MA, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 27 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 27 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 27 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 4 and changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big prize opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the big prize opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball passes through the big prize opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol hold indicator 25 </ b> C that displays the number of general symbols reserved as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  The game board 2 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 50 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged in an aligned manner. The effect movable mechanism 50 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect moving mechanism 50 changes between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are located separately on the upper and lower screens of the main image display device 5MA and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the main image display device 5MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state of facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect movable mechanism 50 shown in FIG. 1 is for the retracted state. In this embodiment, the game area of the game board 2 is constituted by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 50 is arranged behind the transparent plate, and the game ball is produced by the effect. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 50 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

  FIG. 2 shows a case where a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 50 are in an advanced state located in front of the main image display device 5MA. FIG. 3 shows an operation example of the effect moving mechanism 50. The effect movable mechanism 50 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 51 and 52 positioned on the upper side of the screen of the main image display device 5MA in the retracted state, and 2 positioned on the lower side of the screen of the main image display device 5MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism having two movable members 53, 54. That is, the effect movable mechanism 50 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or close to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. Each of the movable members 51 and 52 is pivotally supported by a decoration member 57 at the left end, and is configured to be rotatable with respect to the decoration member 57. The decoration member 57 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 51 by outputting the power from the operation motor 60 </ b> A shown in FIG. 4 to the movable member 51.

  The movable member 51 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 52 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 52 receives power from the operation motor 60B shown in FIG. The motor 60B for operation should just be attached to the front surface of the base body with which the movable member 51 is provided. The operation motor 60B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 52 to be operable. The movable members 53 and 54 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and are moved up and down by transmitting power from the operation motor 60C shown in FIG. 4 via a power transmission unit or the like engaged with the link mechanism. However, it can be rotated around the left end.

  A movable member position sensor 61 shown in FIG. 4 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 50. The movable member position sensor 61 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57. As an example, the movable member position sensor 61 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 60A to 60C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, and the like. From the operation states of the corresponding operation motors 60A to 60C, for example, the positions of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decoration member 57 are referred to. As long as the states of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57 can be detected. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60A. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation positions of the movable members 51 and 52 and the decorative member 57 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation about the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60B, thereby moving the movable member relative to the movable member 51. A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position of 52 is output. The third position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60C, thereby allowing the movable members 53 and 54 to move. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position is output.

  As another example, the movable member position sensor 61 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 51 to 54, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 57, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. Thereby, the 1st-5th position sensor should just detect the operation state etc. of the corresponding movable members 51-54 and the decoration member 57, and should just output the position detection signal etc. according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 61 may include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members.

  In each of the movable members 51 and 52, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 51 constitute a light emitter unit 71 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 52 constitute a light emitter unit 72 of the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. As described above, each of the movable members 51 and 52 includes a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the light emitter units 71 and 72 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 51 and the movable member 52 emit light from the light emitting unit 71 such as rainbow color display by displaying various colors in a single color as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 72. Thus, the light emitter unit 73 and the light emitter unit 74 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters over time, and can execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the light emitter units 71 and 72 included in the movable members 51 and 52, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. A front plate for decorating the movable members 51 and 52 is provided on the front surface of the partition of the movable members 51 and 52.

  Similar to each of the movable members 51 and 52, the movable members 53 and 54 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, in each of the movable members 53 and 54, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 53 constitute a light emitter unit 73 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 54 constitute a light emitter unit 74 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 73 and 74 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 53 and the movable member 54 emit light from the light-emitting unit 73, such as rainbow color display by displaying various colors in a single color in addition to displaying a plurality of colors in a single region. A display effect can be executed by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 74. Thus, the light emitter unit 73 and the light emitter unit 74 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters over time, and can execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the light emitter units 73 and 74 included in the movable members 53 and 54, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. A front plate for decorating the movable members 53 and 54 is provided on the front surface of the partition of the movable members 53 and 54.

  Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction). And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are separated from each other, the movable members 51 to 54 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 5MA. Don't be. At this time, each of the movable members 51 and 52 is located above the main image display device 5MA, and the movable member 52 is located behind the movable member 51, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the movable member 52. It becomes. In addition, each of the movable members 53 and 54 is located below the main image display device 5MA, and the movable member 53 is located behind the movable member 54, so that the player cannot see the movable member 53 or is difficult to see. Become. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the main image display device 5MA becomes visible.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, in the advanced state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are close to each other, the movable members 51 to 54 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 5MA. . When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 52 moves downward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 51, and the movable member 53 moves upward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 54. To do. The movable member 51 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 52, and the movable member 54 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 53. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 5MA is difficult to view or cannot be viewed.

  When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 3A, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 51 to 54 are the same. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 3B, the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 51 to 54, respectively. Match. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, the movable members 51 are aligned by aligning the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 51 to 54, respectively. A sense of unity can be given to the display effects in each of .about.54. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect by executing an integral display effect with the plurality of movable members 51 to 54. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the main image display device 5MA changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 51 to 54, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the production.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are provided around the gaming area. Is provided. Each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a frame member arranged at the peripheral edge of the main image display device 5MA, etc.) A decorative LED may be disposed around the periphery. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B. Note that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B change the display effects in the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU by the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 4 when the operation by the player is detected. Effects such as operation in the movable mechanism 50, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting operations (flashing operations) in light emitters such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) It may be used in such as. Instead of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, or in addition to the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a sensor for detecting the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may have a configuration for directly detecting the player's movement, such as a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, A configuration may be provided that indirectly (remotely) detects the player's operation, such as a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary action may be detected by analyzing a result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In other words, any configuration that can detect the operation of an arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and an audio output board 13 as shown in FIG. 4 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, a drive control board 16B and light emitter control boards 16C to 16F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting control and light-off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and performs the first special symbol and the second special symbol display. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of a special figure. On the main board 11 shown in FIG. 4, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 28 for the big prize door.

  As shown in FIG. 4, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display. Device 5SU, luminous body units 71-74, speakers 8L, 8R, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, movable members 51-54 connected to motors 60A-60C for operation, decorative member 57, and other effects Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by various electrical components for rendering such as a device are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 displays images on the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU, outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, lights on a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74, Lighting motors 60A to 60C that move the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57, lighting the light emitting members constituting the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the decorative LED, which are different from the light emitter units 71 to 74 A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a driving operation of The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 4 includes an effect control microcomputer 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, and effect data memories 123A to 123C.

  The effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting a video signal to the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU and a sound signal (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13. Wiring etc. are connected. In addition, wirings for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D are also connected via the effect control relay board 16A. The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 16B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57 by driving the operation motors 60A to 60C. . The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the plurality of light emitters with respect to the light emitter units 71 to 74.

  The light emitter control board 16D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D is provided as a left frame LED 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters. The light emitter control board 16E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is provided as a top frame LED 9a above the game machine frame 3. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. The light emitter control board 16F is mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 as a right frame LED 9c. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D is only the effect control relay board 16A from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. To be transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 via the light emitter control board 16D in addition to the effect control relay board 16A. The Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 to the effect control relay board 16A, in addition to the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. To be transmitted.

  Further, from the drive control board 16B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 51 to 54 by the movable member position sensor 61 is provided via the effect control relay board 16A. Is transmitted to. Further, as an information signal indicating that a wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, or an operation action of the player on the push button 31B has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 12.

  The audio output board 13 is an audio output board provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R serving as sound output devices in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 12. Various circuits are installed.

  The effect control relay board 16A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the main image display device 5MA may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 11, the audio output board 13, the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 12 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 16B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the rotation of the movable members 51 to 54 is performed. A driver IC for controlling the movement of the decorative member 57 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 16B is transmitted toward the operation motors 60A to 60C. Further, if the drive control board 16B includes wiring for transmitting the position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 61 to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A, etc. Good. The light emitter control board 16C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 12, such as commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are mounted.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU, and a sound used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control command, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, decorative LED, light emitter control command used for controlling lighting operations of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, etc. A movable mechanism control command used for controlling the operation of the mechanism 50 and the like is included.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. The random number circuit 104 is not limited to the one built in the game control microcomputer 100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of the various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. On the effect control board 12, for example, an effect control microcomputer 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, effect data memories 123A to 123C, and the like are mounted. The ROM 121, the RAM 122, and the effect data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> C may be partly or wholly built in the effect control microcomputer 120, or part or all of the ROM 121, RAM 122, and effect data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> C may be external to the effect control microcomputer 120. It may be attached. The presentation control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 5 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 130, a work memory 131, a host interface 132, a DRAM interface 133, and a data memory interface 134. Yes. In addition, the production control microcomputer 120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 141, a display output system interface 142, an audio processing circuit 143, an audio interface 144, and a general-purpose output controller 145. It has. Note that the VDP 140 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The VDP 140, the VRAM 141, the display output system interface 142, the audio processing circuit 143, the audio interface 144, and the general-purpose output controller 145 may be partly or wholly incorporated in the production control microcomputer 120, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 120.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 130 to execute control processing. The RAM 122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 123A to 123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 122 is provided for executing various processes by the CPU 130 and the VDP 140. In addition to the program for effect control, the ROM 121 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

  The effect data memories 123A to 123C store fixed data for executing effects. Among the effect data memories 123A to 123C, the effect data memories 123A and 123B have storage areas for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating display images in the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU. What is necessary is just to be provided. The effect data memory 123C stores various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 60A to 60C in advance, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the light emitter units 71 to 74. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control content may be provided. The light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the light emitter units 71 to 74 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 123A to 123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

  Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the light emitter units 71 to 74 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU. Separately from the image data of the effect image, it is stored in advance in one of the effect data memories 123A and 123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 71 to 74 is added to the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 5SU, and the effect data memories 123A and 123B. It may be stored in advance in either of these. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the light emitter units 71 to 74 is the effect data memories 123A to 123A as image data or light emission data separate from the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 5SU. When the VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes drawing processing, the display data stored in advance in any of 123C is used to display the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 5SU. It may be added to the data.

  FIG. 6 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C. FIG. 6A shows an example of setting the contents stored in the ROM 121. The ROM 121 is assigned consecutive addresses from an address MA00 as a head address to an address MA10 as a final address. FIG. 6 (B1) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 123A. In the effect data memory 123A, an address MA10 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the ROM 121 is given as the head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA20 that is the final address is given. FIG. 6 (B2) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 123B. In the effect data memory 123B, an address MA20 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 123A is given as a head address, and consecutive addresses up to the address MA30 that is the final address are assigned. FIG. 6 (B3) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 123C. In the effect data memory 123C, an address MA30 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 123B is given as the head address, and continuous addresses up to the address MA40 that is the final address are assigned. In this way, continuous addresses are assigned to the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 121 is the head address of the effect data memory 123A.

  In ROM 121 and effect data memories 123A to 123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). The ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 121 stores a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the ROM 121 as a whole has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 121 as management data. That's fine. The ROM 121 and the effect data memory 123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memories 123A and 123B store image data used for controlling the display of effect images in the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU, and further, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame. The image data used for lighting control in the light emitters such as the LED 9c and the plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74 may be stored.

  The ROM 121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Accordingly, the ROM 121 provides a first area for storing sound data as first control data used for sound control for outputting sound from at least the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 123A has a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU or light emitters such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c, and the light emitter units 71 to 74. A second area is provided for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in the.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 121 but also in the effect data memory 123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 121 is allocated from the address MA02 shown in FIG. 6A to the address MA10 that is the final address in the ROM 121. As shown in FIG. 6 (B1), the storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 which is the head address of the effect data memory 123A. As described above, the effect data memory 123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address of the ROM 121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

  The effect data memory 123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the data amount of control information to be stored in the ROM 121 or the like to control the effects by various effect devices increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. There is a case. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced by providing a data storage area used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 121 is allocated to the effect data memory 123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. Thus, the audio data can be read out appropriately.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 5 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts in accordance with the effect control program read from the ROM 121. At this time, the CPU 130 reads fixed data from the ROM 121 via the host interface 132, the CPU 130 writes the various data to the RAM 122 via the DRAM interface 133, and temporarily stores them. The CPU 130 reads out the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 122 via the DRAM interface 133, and the CPU 130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 such as the main board 11 via the host interface 132. A reception operation for receiving an input, a transmission operation in which the CPU 130 outputs various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 132 and other various circuits, and the like. Divide. Further, the CPU 130 can access the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the data memory interface 134, and read stored data.

  The VDP 140 of the production control microcomputer 120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screens of the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU, for example. The image processor executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the CPU. The VDP 140 can access the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the data memory interface 134, and read image data.

  The VRAM 141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 123A and 123B, or a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP 140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. For example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the effect data memories 123A and 123B is stored, and a CG buffer are allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 141. Just do it. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to Display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 141 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The VRAM 141 stores, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. A virtual display area to be stored may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 5MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 141, and the display data of the virtual display area read out by the VDP 140 is displayed and output. You may output from the system | strain interface 142 to the main image display apparatus 5MA side.

  An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 141. In the image display area, display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the main image display device 5MA or the sub image display device 5SU is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA or the sub image display device 5SU is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 140 to the CPU 130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 140 to the CPU 130.

  By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Accordingly, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 142 to the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned in the second drawing display period, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

  A main frame buffer and a subframe buffer may be allocated to each of the storage areas to which the image display area and the image drawing area are allocated in the VRAM 141. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub image display device 5SU.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 accesses system registers and attribute registers built in the VDP 140. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. In this way, in the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 130 indirectly controls display operations in the main image display device 5MA and the sub image display device 5SU.

  The process data shows the setting contents that the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs on the system register and attribute register of the VDP 140 every time V blank occurs. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

  The display output system interface 142 outputs a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data output from the VDP 140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the main image display device 5MA. To output various images on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. The display output system interface 142 displays a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data output from the VDP 140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) as a sub-image display. By outputting to the apparatus 5SU, various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub-image display apparatus 5SU.

  The audio processing circuit 143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The audio processing circuit 143 accesses the ROM 121 via the internal bus of the production control microcomputer 120 and the host interface 132, or produces the production data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> A through the internal bus and the data memory interface 134 of the production control microcomputer 120. The voice data can be read out by accessing 123C. Note that the audio processing circuit 143 may directly access the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C. For example, the sound processing circuit 143 is read from the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C by the access by the CPU 130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of audio data. The audio processing circuit 143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The audio signal (sound effect signal) generated by the audio processing circuit 143 is output toward the audio output board 13 via the audio interface 144.

  The general-purpose output controller 145 has various effects such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, and light emitter units 71 to 74 and drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C. It is a control circuit for performing operation control in the apparatus. The general-purpose output controller 145 can read motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the data memory interface 134. The general-purpose output controller 145 may directly access the effect data memories 123A to 123C. For example, motor data or light emission read from the effect data memories 123A to 123C by access by the CPU 130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 123C, or the display data supplied from the VDP 140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D via the effect control relay board 16A.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 16C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes of the plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 71 to 74 are mounted on the light emitter control board 16C. The light emitter control board 16C shown in FIG. 7 includes a buffer memory 151, a lighting data generation circuit 152, a serial output circuit 153, and a light emitter driver 154.

  The buffer memory 151 temporarily stores data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 151 may correspond to the display data generated by the VDP 140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 123C. The lighting data generation circuit 152 reads the data stored in the buffer memory 151 and executes predetermined conversion processing to generate lighting data that constitutes the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

  The lighting data generation circuit 152 divides a region where the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 are arranged in each of the movable members 51 to 54 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

  FIG. 8 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 51 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. The regions where the plurality of light emitters are arranged on the movable member 51 are light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 8A and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. 8B. Divided. Similarly to the movable member 51, the movable members 52 to 54 other than the movable member 51 are set so as to divide a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. Thus, the entire light emitter units 71 to 74 provided in the movable members 51 to 54 are divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. It should be noted that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 50, the size of a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

  Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, due to the shape of the movable members 51 to 54, the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 71 to 74 cannot be accommodated in the square light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where light emitters less than the body block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

  The serial output circuit 153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 to the light emitter driving unit 154 by a serial signal method. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. The serial output circuit 153 is connected to serial signal wirings corresponding to the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21, and outputs a control signal including lighting control information to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal lines of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

  FIG. 9 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 9, two light emitter blocks among the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are connected to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

  The light emitter driving unit 154 shown in FIG. 7 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers has a strobe side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Accordingly, the driver IC is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. As shown in FIG. 7, in the light emitter control board 16C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C. By doing so, it is configured so as to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10, a strobe-side light emitter driver 411S, a digit upper light emitter driver 411DU, and a digit lower light emitter driver 411DD are provided as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11. Is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 9 includes the strobe side light emitter driver 411S, the digit upper light emitter driver 411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 411DD corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 153. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

  Different address information is assigned to each of the light emitter driver 411S, the light emitter driver 411DU, and the light emitter driver 411DD. The serial output circuit 153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 is output. Transmit the lighting control information.

  The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC and a serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

  The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit upper light emitter driver 411DU and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower light emitter driver 411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. When the light emitter block B11 is composed of only one half block, the light emitter driver 411S on the strobe side and the light emitter driver 411DU on the upper digit side are provided, but the light emitter driver 411DD on the lower digit side is not provided. What is necessary is just composition. Thus, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

  Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines, and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for controlling gradation of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

  Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 71 to 74. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

  The lighting data generation circuit 152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals output within a certain period ( What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

  The serial output circuit 153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system connected to the light emitter block to be controlled by the serial signal method. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 71 to 74, the plurality of light emitters arranged in a row emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). In this way, by configuring the dynamic lighting control to be performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

  FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 16B. As shown in FIG. 11A, a motor drive driver 412 is mounted on the drive control board 16B. The motor drive driver 412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. The motor drive driver 412 performs drive control of the operation motors 60A, 60B, and 60C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 61 is also input to the drive control board 16B and is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 11B shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. As shown in FIG. 11B, a light emitter driver 413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 16D. The light emitter driver 413b receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light emitter driver 413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 9b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 11B, the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11 (2), a light emitter driver 413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 16E. The light emitter driver 413a receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D in a serial signal format. Entered. Then, the light emitter driver 413a performs lighting control of the top LED 9a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, a light emitter driver 413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 16F. The light emitter driver 413c receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. Are input in a serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 9c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (2), in the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 are respectively sent to different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F. By sequentially transmitting between the mounted light emitter drivers 413a to 413c, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are transmitted to the respective light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

  In this embodiment, each LED provided in the gaming machine frame 3 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 9a, a left frame LED 9b, and a right frame LED 9c. Specifically, the gaming machine A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as top frame LEDs 9a above the frame 3, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as left frame LEDs 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as the right frame LED 9c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

  In this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, the light emitter drivers 411S, 411DU, and 411DD shown in FIG. 10) is simply used for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. The light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the motor drive driver 412, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated). Circuit (IC)). FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c converts an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals are different. In the example shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative example, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the luminous body driver 411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the motor driver 412 and the luminous body drivers 413a to 413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (2), the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 16A. Is output to the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E, and the clock signal and the data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit realizing the light emitter driver 413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (2), the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E is input via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control board 16D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the light emitter driver 413c of the light emitter control board 16F. The CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 413a. The clock signal and the data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 413c.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 for inputting decode addresses (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit). By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 14 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  Generally, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set it to the low slew rate output shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the slope of the rising and falling of the waveform is larger, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control microcomputer 120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When there is a large transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output through the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in the state of a waveform that is broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Accordingly, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 120 It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of a common format shown in FIG. 15 (1) and a basic format shown in FIG. 15 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 12 and 13), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 15 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 15 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 15 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, if the operation motor is driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like need not be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed. It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  Although the control data format used for the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described with reference to FIG. 15, the control data format used for the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, the common data shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 15 (2) is different in that the basic format is short because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 15 (3) is different in that it is short because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 16, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  In FIG. 16, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, connection examples when the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16 is used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c will be described. 17 to 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 17 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. FIG. 18 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C. FIG. 19 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c.

  First, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 17 is an example, and since the light emitter units 71 to 74 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, a different decode address is set for each light emitter driver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the light emitter drivers 411 for controlling the lighting of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 16C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the illuminant drivers is performed on the same illuminant control board 16C (transmission across the board is not performed), the resistance to noise does not need to be so much concerned. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 17, each drive output terminal Q0-Q23 is connected to the some light-emitting body which comprises the light-emitting unit 71-74. In the example shown in FIG. 17, for convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, for RGB You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 18 is an example, and other values may be set as the decode address.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor driver 412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 60A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 60B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operating motor 60C.

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the driving accuracy of the operating motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  Conversely, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 71 to 74 described in FIG. 17, or when connecting to the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c of FIG. In the case of connecting to the light source, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, there is no such trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 19 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (2), the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are different light emitter control boards 16D. Since the control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on ˜16F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 19, since the 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and the 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the higher voltage value of 12V The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 19, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 411, motor drive driver 412, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 includes a plurality of light emitters, top frame LEDs 9a, left frame LEDs 9b, and the like constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 in the effect control process (to be described later) (see step S65). A control signal for controlling the lighting of the right frame LED 9c or a control signal for driving and controlling the operation motors 60A to 60C is output, but the timeout function is set to an effective state. When the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, the later-described production control process (see step S65). Accordingly, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is continued. It is controlled to be executed.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter driver are provided every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the outputs from the drive output terminals 413a to 413c are automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is performed, the operation motors 60A to 60C are stopped. In spite of the control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation motors 60A to 60C are not stopped due to a signal loss or malfunction, and the operation motors 60A to 60C are burned. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the timeout function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the motor for operation, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, Unlike the operation motors 60A to 60C, the light emitting body such as the frame LED 9c does not cause problems such as burn-in, so the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is set to an invalid state. Also good.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 120 (may be provided on the effect control board 12 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 16A), When the production control microcomputer 120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. Drive current values of all outputs of .about.Q23, Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided like the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when the light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the movable member) In accordance with the control means for controlling the operation motors 60A to 60C for operating 51 to 54 (in this example, the production control microcomputer 120) and the control signal by the serial communication system from the control means, Output means (in this example, a light emitter driver 411, a motor drive driver 412) that outputs specific signals (in this example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components. Light emitter drivers 413a to 413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 16C. The control signal is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 17, in the light emitter driver 411 mounted on the light emitter control board 16C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 11 (2), the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 19, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F have S. The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the production control microcomputer 120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards Although the case where the board | substrate (in this example, the light-emitting body control boards 16C-16F) in which only any one of the transmission of the control signal by the output state of the normal slew rate is performed is shown, such an aspect It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output from one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 20, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output from one light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control board 16G is branched on the board, The case where the control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413e on the same light emitter control board 16G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G is shown. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 413e and 413f even on the same light emitter control board 16G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to the normal slew rate output state, and the noise tolerance of the control signal may be increased.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 20, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 413g mounted on the light emitter control board 16H is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413h on the same light emitter control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to the normal slew rate output state, and the noise tolerance of the control signal may be increased.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. A signal (in this example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). And the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group as shown in FIG. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable members 51-54) which performs operation | movement is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operation motors 60A to 60C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, As shown in FIG. 18, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has passed since the input of the control signal (timeout function in this example). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 13). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S65)). In the above, by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c The lighting control is continuously executed or the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 13). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  Next, control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is moved by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, "left", "middle", "right" arranged on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the main image display device 5MA.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, the main image display device 5MA is preliminarily displayed on the screen. A definite decorative symbol that is a determined jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a combination of big hits is confirmed by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is set by the big winning door). The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is a second round number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) that is the number of executions of the normal open round. ). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is performed. The period to be changed becomes at least one of the second period shorter than the first period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number. That's fine.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a prize winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which practically no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is the jackpot gaming state (first specified game state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. The gaming state is more disadvantageous for the player than the gaming state. Thus, when the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed based on the fact that the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprising”, the special change is made in the second change mode in which the gaming ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or a big hit gaming state is started before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probable change state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the main image display device 5MA, the decorative symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state in which they match the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to fluctuation, enlargement, reduction, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols change in synchronization with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, a display mode of the background image is changed, and different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the decorative pattern variation mode, such as reproducing and displaying a moving image, may be executed. In addition to the display operation in the main image display device 5MA, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of the movable members 51 to 54, the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LEDs 9a constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the left frame The reach effect may include a lighting operation (flashing operation) or the like in a light emitting body such as the LED 9b or the right frame LED 9c, which is different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The reach state and its state are referred to as reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable symbol display until the first temporary stop for all decorative symbols. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a plurality of pre-set pseudo-respective chances for special combinations are displayed. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed in accordance with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change. The re-variation effect is not limited to the image display on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of a re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect Controls may be made so that the number of which is lit is increased one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside the game area during each change display (including the initial change) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (including the initial change) The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the operation mode of the production model (movable member) may be controlled to change, or among the plurality of production models (movable member). It may be controlled so that what is operated in changes.

  Even if it is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the main image display device 5MA during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Good. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect in which some or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) may be increased.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions (pseudo-continuous times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) than when the number of pseudo-continuous times is small. Get higher. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation (number of pseudo continuous runs). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols are displayed. And / or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that starts executing after the variable display subject to notice is started is referred to as a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, a variable notice, or a variable indication notice effect). Is done.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL are displayed as normal display modes. By changing to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, blue, etc.) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) in a normal time is used as a display color in a display part that displays the number of special figure reservations to be specified. By so doing, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display is set to a specific pattern (for example, cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal time, so that the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by displaying a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual ( Suggest) Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  The pre-reading notice effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize has occurred, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. Anything is acceptable. For example, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). Anything may be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect that predicts that the variable display result may become a “big hit” due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the display of the fixed decorative symbol in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything may be executed (started) before.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes among the hold display change effects is also called a hold display change success effect. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change among the hold display change effects is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change common effect includes the hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. The hold display change common effect, for example, displays an effect image indicating a character (a character for change effect) prepared in advance on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, and acts on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified. It is only necessary to include an effect such as an effect.

  The effect image indicating the character in the reserved display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. A promotion display image P, which will be described later, is an example of the specific effect image. The effect image indicating the character may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA continuously over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting according to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. The effect image indicating the character that becomes the specific effect image only needs to be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as viewed from the player rather than at least a part of the effect image that shows the decorative pattern that becomes the identification information image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative design is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character that becomes the specific effect image is stationary at a position overlapping in front of the effect image indicating the decorative design. Let it be an aspect.

  The action effect in the hold display change common effect is applied to either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests the possibility of a change may be used. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. A part or all of the above may be lit in a predetermined lighting mode, or the production movable member may be operated in a predetermined operating mode.

  When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. Thus, after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action changes is also called the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. As described above, the effect in which the action display in the hold display change common effect is executed but the display mode of the hold display in which the effect is exerted does not change is also referred to as a hold change change effect as the first failure effect.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA is changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, so that “big hit” "Presentation effect of" active display change "is announced to notify the possibility of" More specifically, the display color in the active display unit AHA is set to a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, and blue) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) at the normal time. What is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that possibility of becoming a "hit" is higher than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed on the active display section AHA a specific icon different from the round solid plain at the normal time, for example, a message such as “?”, “Chance”, “hot” is notified, It is only necessary to suggest the possibility that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. In addition, the icon displayed on the active display section AHA includes an icon for notifying that a message such as “NEXT” is notified and that the pseudo continuous variation in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is executed. Also good. The notice effect of “active display change” is also referred to as an active display change effect.

  When the active display change effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the active display in the active display portion AHA, the display mode such as the icon, or the like does not change. Of the active display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of active display changes is also referred to as an active display change success effect. Of the active display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of active display does not change is also referred to as an active display change failure effect. In addition, the active display change effect includes an active display change common effect. When the active display change effect is executed, first, the active display change common effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the active display is changed and when it is not changed is executed.

  In the active display change common effect, similar to the hold display change common effect, for example, an effect image indicating a character (change effect character) to be a specific effect image is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA and acts on the active display. It is only necessary to include an effect that exerts the effect. The action effect in the active display change common effect may be a display effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display may change by acting on the active display in the active display unit AHA. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. A part or all of the above may be lit in a predetermined lighting mode, or the production movable member may be operated in a predetermined operating mode.

  When the active display change success effect is executed after the active display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the active display exerted by the action effect is changed. Thus, after the action effect in the active display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the active display that has acted changes is also referred to as the active change effect as the second successful effect. On the other hand, when the active display change failure effect is executed after the active display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the active display exerted by the action effect is not changed. As described above, the effect in which the action effect in the active display change common effect is executed, but the display mode of the active display in which the effect is exerted does not change is also referred to as an active change gasse effect as the second failure effect.

  The effect of changing the display color of the hold display and the display color of the active display is also referred to as a display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) is also referred to as a special display change effect. The effect of changing the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA to a specific icon different from the normal round solid color is also referred to as an icon display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result indicates that the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state (normally open) with the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game as “per figure”. It is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state (expanded open state) where game balls are likely to pass (enter) more frequently than (state).

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 to variably display the normal symbol, set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (normal symbol variation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” than in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” Part or all of the control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in 6B longer than that in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. And execute.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 21 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is held. Data is set in the second special figure holding storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit is a special game (not yet started), although the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning is generated. The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored as a hold memory. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. (Special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach. As described above, the first special figure storage unit has established the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the first special symbol display device 4A.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach. As described above, the second special figure holding storage unit has established the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, setting for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S212 in FIG. 22 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is set to “big hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110 in FIG. 21, FIG. 26) described later. Determination of whether or not to perform control, determination of variation pattern, and the like are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process in step S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first start winning opening or second start winning opening). By executing this, it is determined whether or not the random symbol value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 is determined to be a variation pattern in which the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. It is determined whether or not. As a result, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” before the variable symbol special symbol display or decorative symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start prize opening is started. Predictive effect as a pre-reading effect is executed by the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side based on the prediction result based on the prediction result. It can be decided whether or not.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state. It only needs to be identified.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit that is a big hit gaming state (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that it is a big hit (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that it is in a high base (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the vehicle is not in high base (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random number value extracted in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (special figure display result determination table data) ) Is selected. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. Regardless of the number of special figure hold memories, the super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing can be determined as a random pattern that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach (disturbance for determining variation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of a plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”, as shown in FIG. 29 (B1) and FIG. 29 (B2), assignment of determination values to a plurality of variation patterns It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 24 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 29 (B1) are assigned to the variation pattern is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 29 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number) when the start winning occurs coincides with the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, there may be a change due to execution of variable display or generation of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. For this reason, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figure storage may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` lost '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 23 that the starting port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (step S404; No), a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning in the process of step S405 is performed. This is performed (step S406). Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening. Restrict the variable display contents from being judged. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of starting winning according to the determination result by the process of step S405 and the setting by the process of step S406 are set (step S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S408), and the winning random number determination processing is terminated.

  FIG. 25 shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command and second reserved memory number notification command), An example of setting a winning determination result command is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure reserved memory count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) occurs, the steps shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is established. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. 22, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211. A first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 23, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) is generated, it is shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 22, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 23, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the first starting prize is detected when the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting prize opening or when the gaming ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the determination result at the time of winning) using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is sent to the effect control board 12 side. To notify. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the game ball passes (enters) either through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Notifying whether it occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 25 (B) exemplifies the notification contents by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 25B, the command C402H, the command C203H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The determination result (variable display content is “big hit”) is notified. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super-reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content) that the variation pattern with super-reach is determined at the time of losing Will notify you of “Super reach when lost”. The command C403H is transmitted when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content is determined to be a variation pattern with a reach effect at the time of losing. “Reach when lost”). The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notification of the determination result (variable display content is “general when lost”). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 shown in FIG. 21 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing a setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed as an effect control command capable of specifying that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and setting the winning prize opening to the open state, etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the number of round games executed with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “2” or “15” depending on the type of jackpot). And a process of waiting until the next round game is started when the upper limit number has not been reached. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is performed by the staging device such as the main image display device 5MA, the speakers 8L and 8R, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. This includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to an execution period elapses, and a process of performing various settings for controlling to a probability changing state or a time-saving state in response to success or failure of a probability changing control condition. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 21 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as the reserved data that has been stored (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 22 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed (entered) the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start prize opening or the second start prize opening is associated with the hold number or separately from the hold data, and is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 And the order in which the start conditions are established can be specified for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the special symbol variable display result, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer. If the special symbol display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S239, the display result of the special symbol derived in the special symbol game becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol is variable. After the display result derived in the display becomes a definite decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by executing the process of step S239.

  In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. The display result is determined as “big hit”. The probability variation state is started when the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability variation” or “sudden probability”, for example, by the big hit end processing in step S117 shown in FIG. Is done. When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). . Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value for determining the big jackpot type includes a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either type. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control buffer setting unit).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), or after executing the process of step S243, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S245, when the next timer interruption occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 21 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S246), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the main image display device 5MA is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the control board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 in FIG. 21 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263).

  In the process of step S262, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 28 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “lost”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not reach the reach state, and the reach state is reached. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and the case of the variable display result (special drawing display result) being “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 29 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 27, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined, for example, at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 29A, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to fluctuation pattern PA3-3 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is used at a predetermined rate as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit. To be determined. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 27, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 29 (B1), for example, at the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 27, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 29 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 29A, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with the reach effect in the super reach such as the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 are the variation patterns PA3-1 to variation patterns. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach such as PA3-3. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 29B1 and 29B2, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effects in the normal reach, such as the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, vary. It is set to be larger than the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is increased.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 29 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “151” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 29 (B1) is read as the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 29 (B2), a determination value to be assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During the time-saving control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation in FIG. 29B2 regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 29 (B2) is replaced with the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S264). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 28, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of step S264, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S265 is executed, a command transmission setting at the time of starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The first variation start command and the second variation start command are also simply referred to as variation start commands. The change pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the main image display device 5MA in response to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 21 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the effect control main process shown in FIG. 30 is executed. When the production control main process is started, the CPU 130 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S52; No), the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but uses a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The CPU 130 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the CPU 130 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (step S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command. . At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a first area provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. The first start opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number among the free areas in the start winning command buffer. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the empty area in the second start prize command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. Among them, the second start opening winning designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number.

  The first start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start slot prize designation command and first reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. CPU 130, in accordance with the reception order of the effect control command received when the first start winning is generated, is a free area in the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” in the first start winning command buffer It stores in order from the beginning. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  The second start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (second start opening prize designation command and second reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. CPU 130, according to the reception order of the effect control command received when the second start winning occurs, the free space in the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer It stores in order from the beginning. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process is executed (step S55). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of light emitters and top frame LEDs 9a constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, Determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices such as the lighting operation of the light emitters such as the left frame LED 9b and the right frame LED 9c. Is done. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S56), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is obtained by software as various random values used for effect control. Update.

  Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main board 11, an error notification process (step S57) for notifying the occurrence of abnormality is executed in accordance with the command. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the main image display device 5MA under the control of the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality is displayed. Output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After execution of the error notification process, the process returns to step S52.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (D1), the error image may be displayed over the entire display area of the main image display device 5MA (full screen display), or as shown in FIG. 43 (D2). As described above, it may be one (partial display) displayed in a part of the display area of the main image display device 5MA. Also, for example, if the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormal winning, an error image is displayed in a full-screen display mode, and the abnormality notification command indicates a ball removal error (the game ball stored in the lower plate has a specified amount). The display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type (severity) of the error, such as displaying in a partial display mode if it indicates an error when exceeding).

  In this embodiment, the error image is not erased from the main image display device 5MA until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is resolved. Accordingly, the error image is not deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see FIG. 43D2), and the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. . In this embodiment, as described later, the volume as the effect can be adjusted by the player's operation, but the error sound cannot be adjusted with the initial setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even though some error has occurred.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 31, first, a hold display setting process is executed (step S161). The hold display setting process updates the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL at the start winning when the first start win or the second start win occurs. Includes processing for. In addition, the hold display setting process includes a determination process and a setting process for performing a pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” using, for example, stored data in a hold display data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 121. Is included.

  FIG. 32 shows a configuration example of the hold display data storage unit. The hold display data storage unit corresponds to the fact that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended or the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, Various data for performing the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and various data for performing the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL are stored as the hold display data. As the hold display data storage unit, it corresponds to the first hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the special figure game using the first special figure and the hold storage display of the special figure game using the second special figure. And a second hold display data storage unit to be provided. In the hold display data storage unit, for example, a winning determination result, a hold display change pattern, and a change effect timing pattern can be specified in association with a hold number similar to the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit. A storage area for storing the data shown in FIG. The winning determination result indicates variable display contents of a special symbol or a decorative symbol specified based on the winning determination result command. The hold display change pattern is an effect pattern including designation of a display mode of the hold display to be changed in the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change”. The change effect timing pattern is an effect pattern including designation of timing for executing a prefetch notice effect of “hold display change”.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S161 of FIG. 31 as the hold display setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 33, first, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 first produces an effect control command (start opening prize designation command, prize determination result command, hold memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the start winning prize. ) Is received (step S301). In the processing of step S301, for example, whether or not a start opening winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a pending storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming the above, it may be determined whether or not a command is received at the time of start winning.

  If no command is received in step S301 (step S301; No), the hold display setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a command received (step S301; Yes), a winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S302). At this time, it is determined whether or not “winning time determination is being restricted” is specified (step S303). If the result of the determination at the time of winning other than “the determination at the time of winning is being limited” (step S303; No), the presence / absence of the on-hold display change effect indicating whether to execute the on-hold display change effect or the on-hold display change effect is executed. The effect type in the case of performing is determined (step S304). The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the hold display change effect that is updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, etc. What is necessary is just to determine the presence or the type and the type of the hold display change effect by referring to the change effect determination table. In the process of step S304, “no change effect” when no hold display change effect is executed, or “change effect exists (1)” or “change effect exists (2)” effect when the hold display change effect is executed. One of the types is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the process of step S304 is “no change effect” (step S305). At this time, if the determination result is “change effect present (1)” or “change effect (2)” but not “change effect” (step S305; No), the presence or absence of display change is determined ( Step S307). The presence / absence of a display change determined in the process of step S307 indicates whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display as the execution result of the hold display change effect. For example, when the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed in the hold display change effect, there is a display change because the display mode of the hold display changes. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after executing the hold display change common effect in the hold display change effect, there is no display change because the display mode of the hold display does not change. That is, by determining whether or not there is a display change in the process of step S307, it is determined whether to execute the hold display change success effect or the hold display change failure effect. The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 extracts numerical data indicating a display change determination random number value updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and a display change determination table prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 121. The presence or absence of a display change may be determined by referring to. In the process of step S307, it is determined as either “with display change” or “without display change”.

  After executing the process of step S307, it is determined whether or not the determination result is “no display change” (step S308). At this time, if the determination result is “with display change” and not “no display change” (step S308; No), it is determined as one of a plurality of reserved display change patterns prepared in advance (step S309). ). When it is determined in step S308 that the determination result is “no change in display” (step S308; Yes), or after the process of step S309 is executed, it is determined as one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns prepared in advance. (Step S310). Then, data indicating that the determination result of the hold display change pattern by the process of step S309 and the determination result of the change effect timing pattern by the process of step S310 are identifiable according to the new start prize in the hold display data storage unit. It is stored in association with the hold number (step S311). However, if the process of step S309 is not executed due to the determination of “no change in display” in the process of step S307, the hold number corresponding to the new start prize is stored in the hold display data storage unit. In association therewith, data indicating the determination result of the change effect timing pattern is stored, while data indicating the determination result of the hold display change pattern is not stored.

  If it is determined in step S303 that “the determination at the time of winning a prize is being restricted” (step S303; Yes), if it is determined in step S305 that “no change effect” (step S305; Yes), or step S311 After the above process is executed, update setting of the hold display at the time of start winning is performed (step S312), and then the hold display setting process is ended. For example, when the first special figure holding memory number increases by 1 because the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening, the first holding display on the first holding display unit 5HR is increased by one. A new first hold display is added. On the other hand, when the second special figure holding memory number increases by 1 because the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening, the second holding display on the second holding display portion 5HL is increased by one. A new second hold display is added. In this embodiment, the normal display mode in the first hold display and the second hold display is a round solid white display. In the process of step S312, the initial display of the first hold display or the second hold display is updated so as to add a hold display that becomes a round solid white display.

  FIG. 34 shows an example of determining the hold display change effect and the display change presence / absence. In the process of step S304 shown in FIG. 33, for example, at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. To decide. In the determination example shown in FIG. 34A, the type and determination ratio of the hold display change effect that can be determined differ depending on the hold number and the determination result at the time of winning. When the holding number is any of “2” to “4”, “no change effect”, “with change effect (1)”, “with change effect (2) at different rates depending on the determination result at the time of winning. ) ”. When the hold number is “1”, it is determined as “no change effect” or “with change effect (1)” at a different rate depending on the winning determination result, and “with change effect (2)” Is not decided. When the winning judgment result is “big hit”, the decision rate of “no change effect” is the lowest, and “changes in the order of“ reach when lost ”,“ reach when lost ”, and“ general when lost ” The determination ratio of “No production” increases. Therefore, when the hold display change effect is executed, the variable display result may be a “big hit”, the possibility that the reach effect in the super reach will be executed, and the decorative pattern change compared to the case where the hold display change effect is not executed. The possibility that the display state becomes a reach state increases.

  The type of the hold display change effect may be any type as long as a plurality of hold display change effect patterns are classified according to the change mode of the hold display. Among the types of hold display change effects, the effect type “with change effect (1)” allows the display color of the hold display to be changed, while the hold display does not change to a display mode indicating a message such as “secret”. Change effect patterns are classified. Among the types of hold display change effects, the effect type “with change effect (2)” is classified as a hold display change effect pattern that can change the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a message such as “secret”. ing.

  In the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 33, for example, the presence or absence of a display change is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the determination example shown in FIG. 34B, the determination ratio of “with display change” varies depending on the winning determination result. When the determination result at the time of winning is “big hit”, it is always determined “with display change” for changing the display (with a determination ratio of 100/100). If the winning judgment result is “Super reach when lost”, “Reach determined when lost”, or “General when lost”, it may be determined that there is no display change. Yes, the determination ratio of “no display change” increases in this order. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold display change effect, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, or the reach effect in the super reach may be executed compared to when the change is not changed. There is a high possibility that the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state.

  In addition, if the determination result at the time of winning is “big hit” and it is always determined that “display change”, the display mode of the hold display even if the hold display change effect is executed corresponding to “no display change” If the change does not change, it is determined that the variable display to be notified is not “big hit”, and there is a possibility that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, even when the winning determination result is “big hit”, it may be set such that “no display change” is determined at a predetermined rate. In this case, it may be set such that “no display change” is determined at a sufficiently lower rate than the other winning determination results.

  FIG. 35 shows a setting example of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern. As shown in FIG. 35A, in this embodiment, the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, the hold display A change pattern ZHP3-1 and a hold display change pattern ZHP10 to a hold display change pattern ZHP13 are prepared in advance. On-hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to on-hold display change pattern ZHP1-3, on-hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to on-hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and on-hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 are “change effects (1)”. The display type is classified as an effect type and the display color of the hold display is changed, while the display mode indicating a message such as “secret” is not changed. The on-hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the on-hold display change pattern ZHP13 are classified into the effect type “with change effect (2)”, and the display mode of the hold display may be changed to a display mode indicating a message such as “secret”. it can. As described above, the plurality of hold display change patterns may be set to be classified into one of a plurality of effect types according to the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change effect is executed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, in this embodiment, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP1-2, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1 to the change effect. Timing pattern TP2-4 and change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to change effect timing pattern TP3-7 are prepared in advance. Each change effect timing pattern is one or a plurality of hold numbers (indicated by “1” to “3” in FIG. 35B) corresponding to the execution timing of the hold display change effect, or the execution timing of the active display change effect. The active display portion AHA corresponding to is designated during active display (indicated by “A” in FIG. 35B). In the hold display data storage unit shown in FIG. 32, data indicating the change effect timing pattern is stored in association with the hold number. When the hold number specified by the change effect timing pattern indicated by the stored data matches the hold number associated with the hold data storage unit, the execution condition of the hold display change effect is established. When the stored data corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the hold data storage unit due to the establishment of the variable display start condition, active display is designated by the change effect timing pattern indicated by the stored data. In this case, the active display change effect execution condition is satisfied. After the execution conditions for the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are established in this way, for example, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the decorative design is started, the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are executed. The hold display change effect and the active display change effect are executed (started).

  By combining such a hold display change pattern and a change effect timing pattern, the hold display change effect that changes the display color to a specific color different from the normal display mode as the display mode of the hold display, and the display color as the display mode of the active display With regard to the active display change effect to be changed to a specific color different from the normal, the presence / absence of each execution and the display color (specific color) after the execution can be collectively determined when a start winning occurs. That is, in this embodiment, with respect to the display color change effect, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening in accordance with the presence / absence of execution, execution timing, execution contents (display color after change), etc. It is possible to make a batch decision when entering.

  In the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the hold display change pattern that is updated by a random number circuit, an effect random counter, or the like. It may be determined as one of a plurality of hold display change patterns by referring to a hold display change pattern determination table prepared and stored in advance.

  FIG. 36 shows an example of determining the hold display change pattern according to the effect type of the hold display change effect “change effect exists (1)”. When the effect type of the pending display change effect is “change effect exists (1)” and the determination result at the time of winning is “hit”, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, the determination as shown in FIG. The ratio is determined as one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, when the effect type of the pending display change effect is “change effect is present (1)” and the determination result at the time of winning is “super reach determination at the time of loss”, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. At one of the determination ratios as shown in FIG. In the determination example shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the hold display change pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ depending on the hold number. For example, when the hold number is “3” or “4”, the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate, while when the hold number is “1” or “2”. Therefore, the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 cannot be determined. Further, when the hold number is any one of “2” to “4”, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 can be determined at a predetermined rate. When the number is “1”, it is impossible to determine these hold display change patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 starts the hold display that becomes the white display that is the normal display mode, and then displays the display color of the hold display (the display color of the corresponding active display). Including) is changed in three steps in the order of blue, green, and red. The execution condition of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be satisfied every time variable display is started. Therefore, in order to change the display color of the hold display in three stages, it is necessary to execute (start) at least three variable displays after the hold display is started. Therefore, when the hold number is “3” or “4”, the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is “1” or “2”, the hold display change pattern. By making ZHP3-1 undecidable, the display color of the hold display can be reliably changed in three stages. The hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 change the display color of the hold display in two stages. Therefore, when the hold number is “2” to “4”, it can be determined as any one of the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, while the hold number is “1”. In such a case, the display color of the hold display can be reliably changed in two stages by making it impossible to determine these hold display change patterns.

  In the determination example shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), the hold display change pattern is determined according to whether the determination result at the time of winning is “big hit” or “super reach determination at lose”. The ratio is different. For example, when the hold number is “3” or “4” and the winning determination result is “big hit”, the holding is held at a higher rate than when the winning determination result is “Super Reach Confirmed at Loss” The display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, or the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 35A, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 are all set so that the display color of the hold display finally becomes red. To change. With such a setting, it can be suggested that when the display color of the hold display changes to red, the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than when the display color changes to another display color.

  FIG. 37 shows an example of determining the hold display change pattern according to the effect type of the hold display change effect “change effect exists (2)”. When the effect type of the hold display change effect is “change effect exists (2)” and the determination result at the time of winning is “hit”, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, the determination as shown in FIG. The ratio is determined as one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, when the effect type of the pending change effect is “change effect exists (2)” and the determination result at the time of winning is “determine super reach when lost”, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. A decision ratio as shown in B) is used to determine one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. In the determination example shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), it is determined as one of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 at a predetermined rate regardless of the hold number.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (A), when the hold number is any of “2” to “4”, the production type of “change production is (2)” at a different rate depending on the winning determination result. On the other hand, when the hold number is “1”, it is impossible to determine the effect type “with change effect (2)”. Therefore, in the case of determining to any one of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, the hold number is any of “2” to “4”. As shown in FIG. 35 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP11 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 each start a hold display that becomes a white display, which is a normal display form, and then change the display form of the hold display to “secret”. 2 ”, and a step of changing the display color of the hold display to one of blue, green, and red. The hold display change pattern ZHP10 changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a “secret” message in one stage. Therefore, if the hold number is any of “2” to “4”, the display mode of the hold display can be reliably changed in two stages.

  In the determination examples shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the determination ratio of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 is sufficiently higher than the determination ratios of the other hold display change patterns regardless of the winning determination result. It is set to be low. Therefore, after the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode indicating the “secret” message, there is a high possibility that the display color of the hold display is further changed to any one of blue, green, and red. Thus, when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode indicating the “secret” message, it can be suggested that the display mode of the hold display is likely to change to the specific mode.

  In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a change effect timing pattern updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and the ROM 121. It may be determined as one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns by referring to a change effect timing pattern determination table prepared and stored in advance.

  FIG. 38 shows an example of determining the changing effect timing pattern corresponding to the case where the winning determination result is “big hit”. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 33, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39 shows an example of determining the changing effect timing pattern corresponding to the case where the determination result at the time of winning is “Super reach determination at the time of loss”. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 33, when the winning determination result is “Super-reach determination at the time of losing”, one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the example of determination shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the change display timing pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ according to the hold display change pattern determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33 and the hold number. If the determination result at the time of winning is “defeat super-reach at the time of losing”, “no change effect” is determined at a predetermined rate in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. At this time, since the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33 is not executed, the hold display change pattern becomes “none”.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, among the cases where the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3 are determined by the process of step S309, the hold number is “4”. In this case, it is possible to determine the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 at a predetermined ratio, but when the hold number is any one of “1” to “3”, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 cannot be determined. It becomes. As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 becomes the hold display change timing when the hold number is “3”. The execution condition of the hold display change effect can be satisfied every time variable display is started. Therefore, in order to execute the hold display change effect when the hold number is “3”, the change effect timing pattern is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number “4” when the start winning is generated. It is necessary to Therefore, when the hold number is “4”, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is any one of “1” to “3”, the change effect timing pattern TP3. By making it undecidable to −1, it is possible to execute the hold display change effect corresponding to the variable display executed (started) when the hold number is “3”.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 39, when the hold display change pattern is “none”, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 are set according to the hold number. It is determined either. As shown in FIG. 35B, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 specify one hold number as the hold display change timing. When the hold display change pattern is not determined, the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold display change effect is executed. Therefore, the hold change gasse effect for one hold display can be executed once before the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started. Note that the change effect timing pattern may be determined so that the hold change change effect for one hold display can be executed a plurality of times.

  38 and 39, in the case of the hold display change pattern ZHP10, according to the hold number, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1. On the other hand, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 cannot be determined regardless of the hold number. As shown in FIG. 35 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP10 starts a hold display that is a white display, which is a normal display form, and then changes the display form of the hold display to a display form indicating a message “secret”. To change. As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 designates active display as the hold display change timing. In this way, in the case of the hold display change pattern ZHP10, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 cannot be determined, so that when the active display change effect is executed, a message that the display mode of the active display is “secret” is displayed. Restrictions can be provided so as not to change the display mode shown. That is, the display mode indicating the “secret” message is included in the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change effect is executed, while the display mode of the active display is displayed after the active display change effect is executed. It becomes a special mode not displayed as.

  After the hold display setting process is executed in step S161 shown in FIG. 31, a change effect character display process is executed (step S162). The character display process for change effect is based on the setting corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, and the effect image indicating the character in the hold display change common effect and the active display change common effect is displayed as a main image. Processing for displaying on the screen of the image display device 5MA is included. The change effect character display processing includes processing for determining whether or not a variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command) or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, This includes processing for performing display control of the effect image indicating the character according to the determination result.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect character display process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not the character is being displayed (step S601). For example, the CPU 130 may determine that the character is being displayed when an effect image indicating a character (change effect character) used in the hold display change common effect or the active display change common effect is displayed.

  If the character is not being displayed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether there is a change effect setting (step S602). For example, the CPU 130 specifies information stored in the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern in the hold display data storage unit, and stores information corresponding to the determination result for executing the hold display change effect and the active display change effect. For example, it may be determined that there is a change effect setting. If there is no change effect setting (step S602; No), the change effect character display process is terminated.

  If there is a change effect setting in step S602 (step S602; Yes), the effect image indicating the change effect character is controlled to start display on the screen of the main image display device 5MA ( Step S603), the change effect character display process is terminated. In the processing of step S603, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may change the display mode of the change effect character according to the determination result of whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative design is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command is output to the VDP 140, for example, instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the decorative symbols are not being variably displayed, a display control command that instructs the change effect character to be displayed in a static mode is output to, for example, the VDP 140.

  The action mode may be a display position, a size, a rotation amount, a moving direction, a moving speed, a moving amount of a change effect character, a part of the shape, pattern, or color of the change effect character according to an animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be a display mode of change display (operation display) that changes over time. The change of the change effect character according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. In contrast to such an action mode, the static mode may be a static display mode in which the change effect character does not change over time. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as a non-static mode or a behavior mode.

  The effect image indicating the change effect character whose display is started when the process of step S603 is executed is an image indicating the character used in the action effect in the hold display change effect or the active display change effect. By performing the process of step S603, the display of the effect image indicating the change effect character is started even before the variable display in which the hold display change effect or the active display change effect is executed is started. Can do. In this case, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA over a plurality of variable displays.

  If the character is being displayed in step S601 (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether it is a predetermined display end timing (step S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, or when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, the hold display change effect or the active display change effect or icon by the hold display change pattern Any timing may be used as long as a predetermined display end condition for the change effect character is satisfied, such as when the execution of the active display change effect by the display change pattern pattern ends. When it is the display end timing (step S604; Yes), after performing the control to end the display on the screen of the main image display device 5MA for the effect image indicating the character to be the change effect character (step S605). Then, the change effect character display process is terminated.

  If it is not the change end timing (step S604; No), it is determined whether or not a change start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S606). In the process of step S606, it may be determined that a variation start command has been received when either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. When the change start command is received (step S606; Yes), after setting for starting the display control during change is made (step S607), the character display process for change effect is ended. In the process of step S607, for example, when it is determined in the process of step S603 that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the action mode is provided. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP140. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into an action mode by reception of the change start command which can specify the start of variable display.

  If no change start command is received in step S606 (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S608). If no symbol confirmation command has been received (step S608; No), the change effect character display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation command is received (step S608; Yes), after setting for starting the symbol confirmation display control is performed (step S609), the change effect character display processing is terminated. In the process of step S609, for example, in the same way as when it is determined in the process of step S603 that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the static mode is provided. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP140. Thereby, in the period when the display result in variable display is derived | led-out, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into a static mode.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. FIG. 41A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for assigning Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 41B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include a small symbol display layer, a change effect display layer, and a decorative symbol display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect is drawn. In the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image showing the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is drawn. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. The Z value of the effect image drawn in each of the small symbol display layer, the change effect display layer, and the decorative symbol display layer by setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. The value varies depending on the display layer on which is drawn.

  For example, the VDP 140 may determine the priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memories 123A and 123B into a VRAM frame buffer or the like. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large value as the Z value. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 41B, the small symbol display layer on which the effect image indicating the small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn is arranged on the most front side as viewed from the player. , Z value is set. Therefore, even when a display effect is displayed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, the player can always visually recognize the display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. . In addition, the change effect display layer is a display layer that provides an effect region in which an effect image used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect is displayed. The Z value is set so as to be arranged in front of the display layer. Thereby, the effect image used by the hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. In this way, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image. The plurality of layers may include an error image display layer. For example, by setting the Z value so that the error image display layer is arranged in front of the small symbol display layer, the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 43 (D1) and (D2)) can be changed. You may make it make it higher than the production image.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process executed in step S163 of FIG. In this embodiment, by performing the effect effect setting process described below, during the game (FIG. 43 (A)) or during the customer waiting demonstration display (FIG. 43 (B)), the player's adjustment operation is performed. The volume as a production effect can be adjusted. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is displayed in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demo image in a predetermined area of the main image display device 5MA. As shown in FIGS. 43A, 43B, and C2, the adjustment result image R is displayed in a bar graph display mode that increases or decreases in the left-right direction, for example. Note that the mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode in which numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume are displayed, a pie chart mode, or the like.
In this embodiment, in the menu mode, when the “volume adjustment” item is selected from the menu screen (FIG. 43 (C1)) and the volume adjustment mode is selected (FIG. 43 (C2)). It is possible to adjust the volume only. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. Further, as will be described later, in response to accepting a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the mode shifts from the customer waiting demonstration display to the menu mode.

  When the effect effect setting process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (step S701). For example, the CPU 130 determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the flag is off. Note that the menu mode execution flag is set to an on state in step S662, which will be described later, and is cleared to an off state in step S661 (see FIG. 45).

  When the menu mode is not being executed (step S701; No), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to an on state in steps S708 and S715, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in steps S704 and S712.

  If the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S702; Yes), the CPU 130 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted (step S703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 31A, for example, and in this embodiment, is an operation for adjusting the volume as the effect. . The player adjusts the volume from within a predetermined range (for example, six levels 1 to 6) by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left and right, for example, and the volume at the point when the tilt operation is stopped. The volume is determined as an adjustment result.

  Note that the sound volume determination operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or pushing the push button 31B separately from the adjustment operation. The operation means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross key or a dial-type operation means (not shown). Further, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor) may be used to adjust the effect by adjusting the player's adjustment detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is set in advance as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result. In this embodiment, the predetermined period T1 is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds). Whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the acceptance of the adjustment operation is determined by, for example, determining that the adjustment operation is present (step S706; Yes) in step S706, which will be described later, and setting the predetermined timer to the predetermined period T1. It is only necessary to set a corresponding value and determine whether or not the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display luminance (light quantity) of the main image display device 5MA or the effect effect lamp as an effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate a luminance adjustment result. Moreover, what is necessary is just to adjust at least one of a volume and a brightness | luminance according to adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length or set to different lengths. May be.

  In step S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted (step S703; Yes), the CPU 130 erases the adjustment result image R from the main image display device 5MA and turns off the adjustment result image display flag. The state is cleared (step S704). With the process in step S704, the adjustment result image R is erased when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation during a game or a demonstration display. Following the process of step S704, the CPU 130 executes the process of step S706. Also, if the determination in step S702 or S703 is No, the process in step S706 is executed.

  In step S701, when the menu mode is being executed (step S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (step S705; Yes), the process of step S706 is executed. For example, the CPU 130 determines that the volume adjustment mode is being selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not being selected if the flag is off. Note that the volume adjustment mode selection flag is set to an on state in step S664 described later, and is cleared to an off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode selection other than volume adjustment is made during execution of the menu mode, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to the off state. When the volume adjustment mode is selected (step S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without performing the process of step S704. Even in the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed. Even if the menu mode is being executed (step S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is not being selected (step S705; No), the effect setting process is terminated.

  In step S706, the CPU 130 determines whether or not an adjustment operation has been performed. For example, when an operation signal from the stick controller 31A (for example, an operation signal indicating a tilting operation in the left-right direction) is input, the CPU 130 determines that there is an adjustment operation (step S706; Yes) and responds to the adjustment operation. The volume setting value is stored in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step S707). In the process of step S707 as well, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed and remains the initial setting value.

  Subsequently, the CPU 130 causes the main image display device 5MA to display the adjustment result image R that notifies the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state (step S708). If the adjustment result image R is already being displayed (Yes in step S702, No in step S703, and Yes in step S706), the volume setting value corresponding to the current adjustment operation is notified. The adjustment result image R is displayed on the main image display device 5MA (updated and displayed from the adjustment result image R according to the previous adjustment operation), and the adjustment result image display flag is kept on.

  After executing the process of step S708 or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of step S706 (step S706; No), the process of step S710 is executed.

  In step S710, CPU 130 determines whether or not it is variable display result derivation display period T2 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “derivation display period”). For example, the CPU 130 is set to an ON state when starting a process of completely stopping and displaying a finalized symbol as a final stop symbol that is a result of variable display of a decorative symbol (derived display) in a later-described variable display effect processing. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the derived display period T2 based on the flag that is cleared to the off state when the process is finished. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, the derived display period T2 is shorter than the predetermined period T1 described above. Note that the derived display period T2 may not be constant, and may be set to be shorter in the time-short state than in the normal state, for example.

  When it is the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (step S710; Yes), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S711), and if it is on (step S711; Yes), the adjustment result image R is erased, and the adjustment result image display flag is cleared to an off state (step S712). Thus, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed since the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is deleted during the derived display period T2 (see FIGS. 44A and 44B described later).

  On the other hand, if it is not the derivation display period T2 for the variable display result (step S710; No), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S713), and if it is off (that is, If the adjustment result image R is not displayed (step S713; No), the process of step S714 is executed.

  In the process of step S714, the CPU 130 determines whether or not the derivation display period T2 for variable display has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed). When the derived display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (step S714; Yes), the CPU 130 returns (displays again) the adjustment result image R and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state. Set (step S715). Thereby, even if the adjustment result image R has been erased in the process of step S712, not the derived display period T2 (step S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has passed but is within the predetermined period T1 (step In S714; Yes, the adjustment result image R is restored and displayed as shown in FIG.

  If the determination is Yes in step S713, the determination is No in steps S705, S711, and S714, or after execution of steps S712 and S715, the CPU 130 ends the effect setting process.

  If the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated or the volume setting corresponding to the adjustment operation is invalidated without going through the processing of step S706 or S707. May be. Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be configured to return to the default (initial setting value) at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific change, after a change is executed a specific number of times, a customer waiting demo display return timing, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. In addition, a plurality of types having different lengths are prepared for the predetermined period T1, and may be used for each gaming state, for example. For example, the predetermined period may be 10 seconds in the short time state, and the predetermined period may be 5 seconds in the normal state.

  Here, a main example of the case where the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2 will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the predetermined period T1 is the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the most recent adjustment operation is performed, but at least part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2 If they overlap, the adjustment result image R is deleted (corresponding to step S712). The example shown in FIG. 44A is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 44B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again (step S715). The display continues until the predetermined period T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derived display period T2 overlaps the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. Thus, according to this embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 43A is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the main image display device 5MA. In this embodiment, the display area of the adjustment result image R is, as shown in FIG. 43A, a decorative symbol display area Ar (an area including the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). It overlaps with a part of.

  FIG. 43B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during demonstration display (during customer demonstration display). During the demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, when an image indicating that a customer waiting demonstration such as “Demo Displaying” is being performed is displayed on the main image display device 5MA and an adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is superimposed and displayed on the demonstration display image.

FIG. 43C1 shows a display example of the menu screen during the menu mode. In this embodiment, in the menu mode, there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation by the player, and the volume adjustment is possible only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 43 (C2). It has become. Selection of an item in the menu mode can be performed, for example, by tilting the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is pushed or pushed with the “volume adjustment” item selected, or the push button 31B is pressed. By pressing the button, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. 43 (C2). The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross key (not shown).
Note that the display mode of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIG. 43A and the volume adjustment mode selected in FIG. 43C2. For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than that during the game, or may be displayed at the center of the main image display device 5MA.

  43 (D1) and 43 (D2) are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error image includes (i) the variable display result. It is not erased during the derivation display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

  After the effect effect setting process is executed in step S163 shown in FIG. 31, for example, the following step S170 is performed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. Any one of the processes of S175 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 5MA based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the screen of the main image display device 5MA. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols on the above and other various presentation operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result, etc. Yes. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122, and from the effect control pattern. Processing for reading various control data and performing various effect controls during variable display of decorative symbols is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is displayed as a complete stop. Processing to display (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, it is autonomous on the side of the production control board 12 without using the production control command from the main board 11. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released. On the other hand, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is initialized. The value is updated to “0”.

  The effect process when the attacker is released in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect process when the attacker is released, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays the effect image based on the set content in the main image display device 5MA. Display on the screen, output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and the drive control board 16B via the effect control relay board 16A. By operating the movable members 51 to 54 and the decoration member 57 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the light source, and by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F via the effect control relay board 16A. A plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame Lit ED9c, off went and by flashing, the special winning opening door as attacker controls various effect operation in a predetermined period which in the open state. In the attacker opening effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the effect image based on the set content is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. Display sound, output sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and a command to the drive control board 16B via the effect control relay board 16A ( The movable member 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57 are operated by the output of the electrical decoration signal), and the light emitter unit is output by the output of the command (electric decoration signal) to the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F via the effect control relay board 16A. A plurality of light emitters, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, and right frame LED constituting 71 to 74 Lit c, off went and by flashing executes various effect control at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S170 of FIG. 31 as variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, first, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (step S651). If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (step S651; Yes), the variation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared to an off state (step S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value “1” corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step S653).

  If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is not on (that is, the variation pattern designation command has not been received) (step S651; No), the CPU 130 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demonstration) is being displayed. Is determined (step S654). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, a customer waiting demonstration displaying flag that is set to an ON state in accordance with execution of step S658 described later.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed (step S654; No), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (step S655). When the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is ON (that is, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received) (step S655; Yes), the CPU 130 has elapsed time since receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. It is determined whether or not 30 seconds have passed (step S656). Whether or not the elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command has passed 30 seconds is determined by, for example, turning on the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag in the command analysis process (S54) shown in FIG. When the state is set, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether or not the timer has timed out.

  If 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S656; Yes), the CPU 130 turns off the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S657) and at the main image display device 5MA. A predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started (step S658). The customer waiting demonstration display is not limited to a mode of displaying a character string such as “Demo Displaying” as shown in FIG. 43 (B), and is arbitrary, for example, a predetermined initial appearance (for example, “123”). A combination of symbols such as “777” or a combination of symbols reminiscent of a big hit such as “777”), a predetermined character, or a logotype of a gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the customer waiting demonstration display is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command (corresponding to the case where the variable display is interrupted) is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started at the timing when 20 seconds or one minute has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Further, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started immediately upon reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  Following the process of step S658 or when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (step S654; Yes), the CPU 130 determines whether or not there has been a menu switching operation (step S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, a pressing operation of the push button 31B that can be accepted during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the CPU 130 determines that the menu switching operation has been performed when the operation signal from the push button 31B is input. To do. The operation means that can accept the menu switching operation is arbitrary, and is not limited to the push button 31B.

  If there is a menu switching operation, the CPU 130 determines whether or not the menu mode execution flag is on (step S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (step S660; No), the customer waiting demonstration display is deleted and the menu display is started (the display on the main image display device 5MA is changed from FIG. 43B to FIG. 43 (C1). ), The menu mode execution flag is set to the on state (step S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode execution flag is on (step S660; Yes), the menu display is deleted and the customer waiting demonstration display is restored (the display on the main image display device 5MA is changed from FIG. 43 (C1) to FIG. 43). (Switch to the mode as shown in (B)), and clear the menu mode execution flag to the off state (step S661).

  Following the process of step S662, the CPU 130 determines whether or not there has been a volume adjustment mode selection operation (step S663). Whether or not the volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed is determined, for example, by whether or not an operation signal is input from an operation unit that receives the operation (such as the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B as described above). do it. When there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (step S663; Yes), the CPU 130 sets a volume adjustment mode selection flag to an on state (step S664). After the execution of steps S653, S661, and S664, or in the case of No determination in steps S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 31 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S321). As the processing of step S321, the CPU 130 performs final processing based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the CPU 130 determines different (unmatched) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and refers to a left determined symbol determining table prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. As a result, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random number circuit or a random counter for effects is extracted, and a right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is determined from the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 130 determines the same (matching) decorative symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. . The CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and refers to the left and right determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. As a result, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the main image display device 5MA are determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random number circuit or a random counter for effects, and referring to a medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Then, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the CPU 130 is the same in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The (coincident) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot determined symbols that are updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the design symbol to be displayed and the probability variation symbol (for example, a design symbol that represents an odd number) is the final design symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable big hit combination) that recalls a big hit in the main image display device 5MA but does not recall a probable change state (non-probable big hit combination) is once stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or big hit game This is an effect of notifying whether or not the state is surely changed at the end of the state.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In this way, by determining the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display content by the process of step S321, whether or not to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the determination result of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game The variable display result of the decorative pattern related to the determination result can be determined. In the process of step S321, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol may be determined as the display result in the variable symbol variable display.

  In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not to execute a promiscuous promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect is determined. It may be determined. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S321, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Subsequent to the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in the process of step S321, a change effect setting process for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect is executed (step S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the active display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the active display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. .

  Following the process of step S322, the CPU 130 executes an operation promotion effect setting process (step S322A). The operation promotion effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S322A, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S323). For example, the CPU 130 selects any one of a plurality of presentation control patterns (special-figure fluctuation production control patterns) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, CPU 130 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the execution setting of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect by the change effect setting process in step S322. Set as usage pattern.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S323, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. (Step S324). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the main image display device 5MA is performed (step S325). At this time, the main image is transmitted by, for example, transmitting to the VDP 140 a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-flight variation effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S323. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the display device 5MA.

  Further, in the process of step S325, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol and starting the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, a small symbol (first small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and a special symbol game using the second special symbol. A small symbol (second small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization may be arranged separately. As an example, the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is arranged on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The second small symbol variably displayed may be arranged on the left side in the small symbol display area 5V. Thus, by confirming which one of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, which of the special game using the first special graphic and the special graphic game using the second special graphic is executed. It is only necessary for a player or the like to be able to identify whether the game is being played. When the first small symbol and the second small symbol are separately arranged, for example, based on a change start command transmitted from the main board 11, a special game using the first special graphic and the second special graphic are used. What is necessary is just to determine in which special display game variable display is started among the special figure games using. When the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started, while when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second special figure game is started. What is necessary is just to start the variable display of a small symbol. As described above, in the small symbol display area 5V, the effect image indicating the first small symbol that becomes the first notification information image is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol, and the display result is derived. The display result may be derived by performing variable display of the effect image indicating the second small symbol that becomes the second notification information image in synchronization with the special game using the second special figure.

  After executing the processing of step S325, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, the first hold display in the first hold display section 5HR, the second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, and the like. Settings for updating are performed (step S326). For example, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the leftmost display part) corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR. (Digestion) and move (shift) the first hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part on the right end) corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the second holding display part 5HL. (Digestion) and move (shift) the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one in the right direction. Further, in the process of step S326, setting for updating the active display in the active display portion AHA is also performed. For example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the first hold display unit 5HR, the active display unit displays the same active display as the erased (digested) first hold display. Start with AHA. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the second hold display portion 5HL, an active display similar to the erased (digested) second hold display is actively displayed. Start at part AHA. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S327), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step S322 of FIG. In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 47A, first, the stored content in the hold display data storage unit is updated (step S501). That is, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, the stored data in the storage area of the holding number “1” is erased in the holding display data storage unit, and the storage area below the holding number “1” The storage data in the storage areas (holding numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted up by one entry.

  Following the processing of step S501, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing is reached, which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect (step S502). In the process of step S502, one or a plurality of change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose storage contents have been updated by the process of step S501 match the hold numbers associated with the respective change effect timing patterns. It is determined whether or not the designation of the hold display change timing to be included is included. For example, when any one of the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to change effect timing pattern TP3-7 shown in FIG. 35B is stored in association with the hold number “3” in the hold display data storage unit. Since the designation of the hold display change timing matching the hold number “3” is included, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached. Any one of the change effect timing pattern TP2-1 to change effect timing pattern TP2-4, the change effect timing pattern TP3-4, the change effect timing pattern TP3-6, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-7 is in the hold display data storage unit. When it is stored in association with the hold number “2”, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached because the hold display change timing matching the hold number “2” is included. . Change effect timing pattern TP1-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-3, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, change effect timing pattern TP3-3, change effect timing pattern TP3-5, change effect When any one of the timing patterns TP3-7 is stored in association with the hold number “1” in the hold display data storage unit, the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number “1” is included. Therefore, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S502; Yes), execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S503). For example, in the processing of step S503, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and whether or not the display mode is changed, and the change when changing What is necessary is just to make the setting of a display mode etc. later. Further, in the process of step S503, execution setting of the display color change effect that changes the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern among the active display change effects may be performed. In this case, setting of the display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is specified by specifying the hold display change pattern indicated in the stored data erased from the hold display data storage unit in the process of step S501. It should be done. Of the hold display change common effect and the active display change common effect, the setting for starting the display of the effect image indicating the character (change effect character) is performed in the process of step S603 shown in FIG. The process of step S503 may not be performed. On the other hand, the setting for executing the action effect in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect may be performed in the process of step S503.

  If it is determined in step S502 that it is not the hold display change timing (step S502; No), after executing the process of step S503, the “pseudo-continuous” is determined according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. It is determined whether or not the variable display effect is executed (step S504). At this time, if it is determined that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed (step S504; Yes), the icon display change effect indicating whether or not to execute the icon display change effect among the active display change effects. The presence or absence of is determined (step S505). The CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining an icon display change effect that is updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and refers to an icon display change effect determination table prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. For example, the presence or absence of an icon display change effect may be determined. In the process of step S505, it is determined as either “no change effect” that does not execute the icon display change effect or “with change effect” that executes the icon display change effect.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed (step S505; No), it is determined whether or not the display color change effect is being executed during active display (step S506). . At this time, when it is determined that the display color change effect is executed (step S506; Yes), the change effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display color change effect is not executed (step S506; No), the process proceeds to step S505, and the presence or absence of the icon display change effect is determined.

  After executing the process of step S505, it is determined whether or not the determination result is “no change effect” (step S507). When the determination result is “no change effect” (step S507; Yes), the change effect setting process ends. If the determination result is “with change effect” (step S507; No), the change effect setting process is terminated after determining one of the plurality of icon display change patterns prepared in advance (step S508). .

  FIG. 47B shows an example of determining an icon display change effect. In the process of step S505 shown in FIG. 47A, the presence / absence of an icon display change effect is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 47B, for example. In the determination example shown in FIG. 47 (B), the determination ratio of “with change effect” varies depending on the variable display content. For example, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)”, the determination rate of “no change effect” is the lowest, and “non-probability change (big hit)”, “reach (losing)”, “non-reaching (lost)” The order of determination of “no change effect” increases. Therefore, when the icon display change effect is executed, the probability change control may be performed after the end of the big hit gaming state, the possibility that the variable display result may be “big hit”, and the decorative pattern, compared to the case where the icon display change effect is not executed. There is a high possibility that the variable display state becomes a reach state.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of setting an icon display change pattern. Here, in correspondence with the case where there is no pseudo continuous fluctuation in which the variable display of “pseudo continuous” is not executed, and the case where the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is executed and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed three times in advance, A plurality of prepared icon display change patterns are shown. When there is no pseudo continuous change, as shown in FIG. 48A, an icon display change effect can be executed by any one of the icon display change pattern YAP1 to icon display change pattern YAP3. Note that the icon display change pattern may not be determined even if “change effect is present” is determined to execute the icon display change effect. In this case, after executing the active display change common effect in the active display change effect, the active display change failure effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display does not change. The icon display change pattern YAP1 to icon display change pattern YAP3 changes the icons displayed on the active display portion AHA to specific icons for informing messages of “?”, “Chance”, and “hot”, respectively.

  In the case of three pseudo-variations, as shown in FIG. 48B, icon display change patterns YDP1-1 to icon display change patterns YDP1-4, icon display change patterns YDP2-1 to icon display change patterns YDP2- 4. Icon display change effect by any of icon display change pattern YDP3-1 to icon display change pattern YDP3-4 can be executed. When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the icon display change effect is executed corresponding to the initial change and the pseudo-change of each time. As a result, the active display change effect can be executed a plurality of times and the display mode of the active display can be changed from when the decorative display of the decorative design is started until the confirmed decorative design that is the display result is derived. . In addition, when the change effect timing pattern to change the display during the active display is determined in step S310 of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 33, the display color change effect may be executed with the first variation.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 48B, the icon for informing the message “NEXT” is displayed after the active display change effect is executed only when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The display mode is active display. Further, the icon for informing the message of “NEXT” is the active display change at the final change when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, such as the third time of the pseudo-continuous change in the setting example shown in FIG. After the effect is executed, the display mode is not displayed as the active display mode. That is, the icon that notifies the message “NEXT” is displayed after the active display change effect is executed during the variable display before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo continuous change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. A display mode that is included in the display mode of the active display that can be displayed and that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is executed during the variable display after the predetermined number of pseudo-continuous changes are performed Become.

  In the setting examples shown in FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), an icon for notifying a message such as “?”, “Chance”, “extreme heat”, “NEXT”, or the like has an active display change effect. While it is included in the display mode of the active display displayed later, it becomes a special mode which is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the hold display change effect is executed.

  FIG. 49 shows an example of determining an icon display change pattern. In the process of step S508 shown in FIG. 47A, the CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining an icon display change pattern updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. The icon display change pattern determination table prepared as described above may be used to determine one of a plurality of icon display change patterns.

  In the case where there is no pseudo-continuous variation in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, a plurality of icon displays are performed at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49A by the processing in step S508 shown in FIG. Determine one of the change patterns. On the other hand, in the case where the pseudo continuous variation is executed three times in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect, the process of step S508 shown in FIG. Is determined as one of a plurality of icon display change patterns at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the determination examples shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the icon display change pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ depending on the variable display contents. For example, in the example of determination shown in FIG. 49A, when the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the icon display change pattern YAP3 can be determined, while variable display is possible. When the content is “non-reach (lack)” or “reach (lack)”, the icon display change pattern YAP3 cannot be determined. Further, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined as one of the icon display change pattern YAP1 to icon display change pattern YAP3 at a predetermined ratio. When the display content is “non-reach (lack)” or “reach (lack)”, the icon display change pattern becomes “none” at a predetermined rate.

  With such a setting, when there is no pseudo-continuous fluctuation, an active display change effect is executed, and when a display mode for displaying a message of “extreme heat” is displayed as a display mode after change by the icon display change pattern YAP3 In the current variable display corresponding to the active display, it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, when there is no pseudo-continuous change, an active display change effect is executed, and when the icon display change pattern is an active change gasset effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change corresponding to “None”, the active display change effect is displayed. In the corresponding current variable display, it is determined that the variable display result is not “big hit” but “lost”.

  Depending on the display mode of the active display displayed after the active display change effect is executed, the variable display result may be “big hit” or “lost” in the current variable display corresponding to the active display. If it is confirmed, there is a risk that the gaming interests until the variable display ends will decline. Therefore, for example, even when the variable display content is “non-reach (lack)” or “reach (lack)”, the icon display change pattern YAP3 may be determined at a predetermined rate. In this case, the variable display content may be set to be determined as the icon display change pattern YAP3 at a sufficiently lower rate than the cases of “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”. Further, for example, even when the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the icon display change pattern may be set to “none” at a predetermined rate. In this case, set the variable display content to be determined to be “None” at a sufficiently low rate compared to “Non-reach (lack)” or “Reach (lack)”. Also good.

  The ratio at which the icon display change pattern is determined to be “none” in the process of step S508 shown in FIG. 47A is higher than the ratio at which “no display change” is determined in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. It is set to be low. For example, as shown in FIG. 34B, in the process of step S307, when the determination result at the time of winning is “general at the time of loss”, it is determined as “display change” at a ratio of 20/100. That is, in this case, “no display change” is determined at a rate of 80/100. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49A, for example, in the process of step S508, when the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the icon display change pattern is set to “none” at a ratio of 5/100. It is determined. When it is determined that “no display change” is determined in step S307, a pending change gaze effect is executed, and when the icon display change pattern is determined “none” in step S508, an active change gaze effect is executed. The With such a setting, the percentage of the active change gaze effect that does not change the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is executed is the ratio that the display mode of the hold display changes after the hold display change effect is executed. It will be lower than the rate at which the pending change gaze effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the active display change success effect serving as the second successful effect in the active display change effect at a rate higher than the ratio of executing the hold display change success effect serving as the first successful effect in the hold display change effect. it can.

  Among the plurality of change effect timing patterns shown in FIG. 35 (B), change effect timing pattern TP0-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, When the change effect timing pattern TP3-2, the change effect timing pattern TP3-5, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-6 are determined, it becomes the hold display change timing during the active display, and the display color as the display mode of the active display An active display change effect that is a display color change effect to be changed to a specific color is executed. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 33, the determination ratio of the change effect timing pattern that becomes the hold display change timing during the active display is lower than the determination ratio of the change effect timing pattern that does not become the hold change timing during the active display. Any change effect timing pattern may be determined using the determination table set to be. In the process of step S506 shown in FIG. 47A, if it is determined that the display color change effect is executed during active display, the process does not proceed to step S505, and the icon display change effect is not executed. For this reason, if the rate at which the display color change effect is executed during active display increases, the icon display change effect may become difficult to execute. Therefore, the rate of execution of the icon display change effect may be increased by reducing the determination rate of the change effect timing pattern that becomes the hold display change timing during active display.

  If it is determined in step S506 shown in FIG. 47A that the display color change effect is being executed during active display, the change effect setting process is terminated without proceeding to the process of step S505, whereby the icon is displayed. Restrict the display change effect from being executed. As a result, the active display change effect, which is the display color change effect, and the active display change effect, which is the icon display change effect, are not executed redundantly, thereby preventing complicated effects. Can be improved.

  FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S322A of FIG. 46 as the operation promotion effect setting processing. In the operation promotion effect setting process, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 first specifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (step S801). The variable display result can be specified by a winning determination result command transmitted from the main board 11, and the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Subsequently, the CPU 130 determines whether or not the variation pattern identified in step S801 is accompanied by super reach execution (step S802). When it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step S802; Yes), CPU130 sets an operation promotion production execution decision flag to an ON state (step S803). For example, the flag is cleared to an off state in the process of step S858 (FIG. 52) described later.

  Subsequently, the CPU 130 determines the type of cut-in effect (step S804). For example, the CPU 130 extracts a cut-in effect execution determination random number and determines the type of cut-in effect using a cut-in effect type determination table (see FIG. 50B). For example, the CPU 130 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the cut-in effect type that is updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter, and the cut-in effect type determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121. The type of cut-in effect may be determined by referring to.

  The cut-in effect is an effect that is inserted when there is a button operation (for example, operation of the push button 31B) by a player during the effective period of the button operation in the super reach effect. It is an effect in which a scene in which appears is inserted. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50B, a cut-in effect A and a cut-in effect B having different aspects are prepared as cut-in effects. It should be noted that during the effective period of the button operation, an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is performed (an operation promotion image P as shown in FIG. 53C is displayed on the main image display device 5MA). After execution of step S804 or when the pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step S802; No), the CPU 130 ends the operation promotion effect setting process.

  In the cut-in effect type determination table shown in FIG. 50B as an example, “cut-in effect A” is determined with a probability of 20% when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Is determined with a probability of 80%. When the variation pattern is a super reach loss, “cut-in effect A” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “cut-in effect B” is determined with a probability of 30%. Since the determination probability is set as described above, the “cut-in effect B” is more easily performed when the super reach big hit is obtained in the variable display than when the super reach lose is achieved. In addition, the cut-in effect is not executed in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss. In other words, there is a higher possibility of a big hit when the cut-in effect is executed than when the cut-in effect is not executed, and when the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect B is bigger than the cut-in effect A. Is likely to become. Note that the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. 50B is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of super reach loss, “cut-in effect A” and “cut-in effect B” may be executed with the same probability. Two or more types of cut-in effects may be prepared, or one type may be provided.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of FIG. 31 as variable display effect processing. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 51, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S323 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands generated based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the VDP 140, the audio output board 13, the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, and the like. Thereby, displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the main image display device 5MA, outputting predetermined sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, operating the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57, A plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are turned on, blinked, or turned off, or some or all of these are combined to produce a predetermined effect. It is only necessary that the hold display change effect can be executed by the device.

  In addition, the display of the effect image showing the character (change effect character) in the hold display change common effect among the hold display change effects is started by executing the process of step S603 shown in FIG. Display control during variable display or symbol determination is performed by executing the processes of S607 and S609, and the display is ended by executing the process of step S605. Therefore, in the process of step S343, display control related to the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the hold display change effect is executed, the display of the change effect character is controlled in the process of step S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect in the process of step S343. The display control of the character may not be performed.

  When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), after executing the process of step S343, it is an active display change effect period for executing the active display change effect. Is determined (step S344). The active display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S323 shown in FIG. When it is an active display change effect period (step S344; Yes), control for performing an active display change effect is performed (step S345). Note that the hold display change effect and the active display change effect may be executed by performing common effect control. In this case, instead of the processing of steps S342 to S345, it is determined whether or not it is a display change effect period common to the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, and when it is determined that it is the display change effect period. The control for executing the hold display change effect and the active display change effect may be performed according to the display change effect control pattern.

  Also, the effect image showing the character (change effect character) in the active display change common effect among the active display change effects is displayed by executing the process of step S603 shown in FIG. Display control during variable display or symbol determination is performed by executing the processes of S607 and S609, and the display is ended by executing the process of step S605. Therefore, in the process of step S345, display control related to the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the active display change effect is executed, the display of the change effect character is controlled in the process of step S345, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect character in step S345. The display control may not be performed.

  When it is determined in step S344 that it is not the active display change effect period (step S344; No), after executing the process of step S345, it is determined whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Determination is made (step S346). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is the reach production period (step S346; Yes), control for executing the reach production is performed (step S347).

  When it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach effect period (step S346; No), after executing the process of step S347, the CPU 130 determines whether or not the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is on. Determination is made (step S347A). The operation promotion effect execution determination flag is set to the on state in the process of step S803 described above, and is cleared to the off state in the process of step S858 described later. When the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is on (step S347A; Yes), the CPU 130 executes an operation promotion effect process (step S347B). The operation promotion effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the operation promotion effect process is executed or when the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is OFF (step S347A; No), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Then, control for executing effects during variable display including decorative display variable display operation is performed (step S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S349). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If the symbol confirmation command is received in step S349 (step S349; Yes), the final display result is displayed in the decorative symbol variable display such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 140, for example. Control for deriving and displaying a stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) is performed (step S350). In the process of step S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control for terminating the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. In the small symbol variation end control, as a display result in the variable symbol variable display, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of step S321 shown in FIG. 46 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V. Just do it. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol. When the variable display is terminated after being derived, the variable display of the small symbols can also be ended. At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S351). Also, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S352), the effect process during variable display is ended.

  For example, in the process of step S348 shown in FIG. 51, display control is performed in the small symbol display area 5V so that the small symbols are always variably displayed in a constant variation manner regardless of the variable display state of the decorative symbols. What should I do? For example, when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes a reach state or when a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C Even when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed partially or entirely in 5R, the small symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V, and the variable display continuously fluctuates at a constant speed. Can be done.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation promotion effect process executed in step S347B of FIG. In the operation promotion effect process, first, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether or not the operation promotion display is being performed (step S851). For example, whether or not the operation promotion display is being performed is set to an on state with execution of a later-described step S853, and is cleared to an off state with execution of later-described steps S855 and S857. It may be determined whether or not the middle flag is on.

  When the operation promotion display is not being performed (step S851; No), the CPU 130 determines whether it is the execution start timing of the operation promotion display (step S852). If it is the execution start timing of the operation promotion display (step S852; Yes), the CPU 130 displays the operation promotion image P as shown in FIG. 53C on the main image display device 5MA (starts the operation promotion display). (Step S853). The operation promotion display execution and termination timings are described in the operation promotion effect process table.

  On the other hand, when the operation promotion display is being performed (step S851; Yes), the CPU 130 determines whether it is the end timing of the operation promotion display (step S854). When it is the end timing of the operation promotion display (step S854; Yes), the operation promotion image P is erased (the operation promotion display is ended), and an effect without cut-in is executed (step S855). That is, the predetermined reach effect is executed without executing the cut-in effect determined in step S804.

  If it is the end timing of the operation promotion display in step S854 (step S854; Yes), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the push button 31B is operated (step S856). When the operation of the push button 31B is present (step S854; Yes), the CPU 130 ends the operation promotion display and executes the effect with cut-in (step S857). That is, the cut-in effect A or B determined in step S804 is executed, and a predetermined reach effect is executed.

  Subsequent to step S855 or S857, CPU 130 clears the operation promotion effect execution determination flag to the off state (step S858). After the execution of step S858, or when the determination in step S852 or S856 is No, the operation promotion effect process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes through (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a start winning such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. Based on the establishment of the start condition that permits the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the variable symbol special symbol display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The On the screen of the main image display device 5MA, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols is performed in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, the processing of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 22 is executed. , 1 is added to the number of first special figure hold memory. When the second start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening, the processes of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 22 are executed. The second special figure holding storage number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the process of step S209. In step S212, a winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 5 is executed to determine variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Is received from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In step S301 shown in FIG. 33, it is determined whether or not an effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning including the winning determination result command has been received. If it is determined that there is a command received, the presence / absence or type of the pending display change effect is determined by the process of step S304 based on the winning determination result specified in the process of step S302. At this time, if it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, the presence / absence of the display change is decided by the process of step S307. When it is determined that there is a display change, the pending display change pattern is determined by the process of step S309, and when it is determined that there is no display change, the process of step S310 is not executed and the change effect is performed by the process of step S310. A timing pattern is determined. The determination result of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern is stored in association with the hold number in the hold display data storage unit by the process of step S311.

  In step S602 shown in FIG. 40, it is determined whether there is a setting for executing a change effect such as a hold display change effect based on the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit. When it is determined that there is a setting, display of the effect image indicating the character (change effect character) is started by the display start control in step S603. The effect image indicating the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in step S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined in step S606 that a change start command has been received, so that the control start setting in step S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the change effect character is displayed. It becomes an action mode corresponding to the variable display (fluctuating) of the symbol. On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in step S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, so that the control start setting in step S609 is performed and the change effect character is indicated. The display mode of the effect image is a static mode corresponding to the fixed display of the decorative pattern. In this way, during the period in which the display result of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character can be set to the stationary mode.

  When the special display game or the variable display of decorative symbols is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of variation patterns are executed by executing the variation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 27 in step S111 shown in FIG. And a variation pattern designation command indicating that the determined variation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In step S321 shown in FIG. 46, a final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and then, as a change effect setting process in step S322, as shown in FIG. 47 (A). Processing is executed. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is reached, execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S503. In addition, the execution setting of the active display change effect as the display color change effect may be performed in step S503. If it is determined in step S504 that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, or the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, but the display color change effect is not executed during active display in step S506. If it is determined, the presence / absence of an icon display change effect is determined in step S506. When the icon display change effect is executed, an icon display change pattern is determined in step S508.

  Here, an example of the case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 shows the execution of the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 50A when it is determined that the pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step S802; Yes) and the type of cut-in effect is determined (step S804). An example is shown.

  When the decorative symbol variable display (fluctuation) is executed and the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 53 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and then FIG. 53 (B). By displaying a development notification image (in the illustrated example, “Super Reach!”) On the main image display device 5MA, the development notification to Super Reach is performed. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the main image display device 5MA as shown in FIG. 53B (corresponding to step S710).

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 53C (start of the operation promotion display. This corresponds to step S853 shown in FIG. 52. ). Then, when the operation with the push button 31B is performed, as shown in FIG. 53D, a predetermined cut-in effect (cut-in effect A or B shown in FIG. 50B) is executed (FIG. 52). This corresponds to the case where Step S858 is executed after Yes is determined in Step S856). It should be noted that the cut-in effect is not executed when the operation by the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P (corresponding to the case where Step S855 is executed after Yes is determined in Step S854 in FIG. 52). . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53E, for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the main image display device 5MA as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to step S712) as shown in FIG. 53E even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  FIG. 54 shows an execution example of the hold display change effect when the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 is determined by the process of step S310 shown in FIG. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 54A, the hold display corresponding to the hold numbers “1” to “4” is performed in the second hold display portion 5HL, and the current variable display is displayed in the active display portion AHA. Active display corresponding to is performed. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. Among the hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display of the hold number “3” (third from the right end) is set in the process of step S304 shown in FIG. (1) ”. As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 becomes the hold display change timing when the hold number is “3”. Corresponding to the determination result in the process of step S310, in the process of step S311, data indicating the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 is stored in the hold display data storage unit together with data indicating the determination result of the hold display change pattern. The

  In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 40, when it is determined in step S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in step S602 whether there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, when it is determined that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the process of step S603 is executed. Thereby, for example, an effect image showing the character CH1 as shown in FIG. 54A is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 54B, a hold display change common effect including an effect effect in which the effect image of the character CH1 acts on the hold display of the hold number “3” is executed. Subsequently, a hold display change effect according to the presence / absence of the display change and the determination result of the hold display change pattern is executed. For example, in the case where “display change” is determined in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 33 and the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 is determined in the process of step S309, FIG. 54 (C1) As shown in FIG. 4, the on-hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed as the display mode of the on-hold display. On the other hand, when “no display change” is determined in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 33, the hold display change failure in which the display mode of the hold display does not change as shown in FIG. 54 (C2). A production (holding change gaze production) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (C1) and FIG. 54 (C2), even when a definite decorative symbol that is a display result in decorative symbol variable display is derived, the display end timing is displayed in the process of step S604 shown in FIG. Until it is determined, the effect image indicating the character CH1 is continuously displayed. At this time, if it is determined in step S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, the process in step S609 is executed. Thereby, in the period when the definitive decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the static mode. Subsequently, when variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, and the like is started based on the fact that the stored memory number is other than “0”, it is assumed that a change start command has been received in the process of step S606 shown in FIG. As a result of the determination, the process of step S607 is executed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode triggered by the reception of the change start command that becomes the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

  FIG. 55 shows an execution example of a display color change effect and an icon display change effect during active display. In this execution example, after the decorative design variable display as shown in FIG. 55A and the effect image showing the character CH1 are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 55B, the effect image of the character CH1 is displayed. The active display change common effect including the effect that acts on the active display in the active display portion AHA is executed. The active display change common effect shown in FIG. 55 (B) includes an effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 acts, although it differs in whether the action target is a hold display or an active display. This is an effect mode common to the common display change common effect shown in FIG. Corresponding to the active display, when the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 is determined in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33 and the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 is determined in the process of step S310. As shown in FIG. 55 (C1), the active display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed as the display mode of the active display. On the other hand, when “changed effect” is determined in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. 47A and the icon display change pattern YAP2 is determined in the process of step S508, FIG. As shown in C2), the active display change success effect is executed in which the display mode of the active display is changed to the display mode for notifying the message “chance”.

  After the active display change success effect is executed, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, it is determined that it is the display end timing in the process of step S604 shown in FIG. 40, so that step S605 is performed. The process is executed. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (C1) and FIG. 55 (C2), when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, the display of the effect image indicating the character CH1 can be terminated.

  FIG. 56 shows an effect execution example in which a plurality of hold display change effects are executed corresponding to one hold display. FIG. 57 shows the execution timing of each effect shown in FIG. In the effect execution example shown in FIG. 56, the hold display change pattern ZHP12 is determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33 corresponding to the hold display of the hold number “3” among the hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL. The change effect timing pattern TP3-3 is determined by the process of step S310. As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 becomes the hold display change timing when the hold number is “3” and the hold number is “1”. Based on the determination results of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern, it is determined that there is a setting for executing the change effect by the process of step S602 shown in FIG. By performing the display start control in step S603 according to such a determination result, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA.

  When variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 56A is started at timing T01 shown in FIG. 57, it is determined that a change start command has been received by the processing in step S606 shown in FIG. Then, the process of step S607 is executed. Thereby, triggered by the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main board 11, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode. Also, in the process of step S502 shown in FIG. 47A, it is determined that it is the hold display change timing. Therefore, based on the execution setting by the process of step S503, the hold display change effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  For example, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03 shown in FIG. 57, it is determined in the process of step S342 shown in FIG. 51 that it is the hold display change effect period, and the process of step S343 is executed. Thereby, the hold display change common effect as shown in FIG. 56 (B) can be executed. After the performance shown in FIG. 56 (B) is executed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold number “3” changes to the display mode showing the “secret” message as shown in FIG. 56 (C). To do. When the timing T04 shown in FIG. 57 is reached, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed. finish. At this time, it is determined by the process of step S608 shown in FIG. 40 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, and the process of step S609 is executed. Thereby, when the display result of the variable display in a decoration design or a small design is derived | led-out, the display mode of the effect image which shows character CH1 turns into a stop mode.

  Following the end of variable display as shown in FIG. 56 (D), at timing T05 shown in FIG. 57, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 56 (E) is started. At this time, by the process of step S501 shown in FIG. 47A, the storage data indicating the storage display change pattern ZHP12 and the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 is moved (shifted) in the storage display data storage unit, and the storage number is stored. Stored in association with “2”. Since the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 does not include the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number “2”, it is determined in step S502 that it is not the hold display change timing. Therefore, the hold display change effect is not executed during the current variable display. Also, when the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 56E is started, it is determined that the change start command has been received by the processing in step S606 shown in FIG. 40, and the processing in step S607 is performed. By being executed, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode.

  After the variable display as shown in FIG. 56 (E) is started, at the timing T06 shown in FIG. 57, as shown in FIG. 56 (F), the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and fixedly displayed. At the same time, the small display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. At this time, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the static mode. Subsequently, at timing T07 shown in FIG. 57, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 56 (G) is started. At this time, in response to receiving the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the action mode. 47A, the storage data indicating the hold display change pattern ZHP12 and the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 is moved (shifted) in the hold display data storage unit, and the hold number “ 1 ”and stored. Since the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 includes designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number “1”, it is determined in step S502 that it is the hold display change timing. Therefore, based on the execution setting by the process of step S503, the hold display change effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  For example, in the period from timing T08 to timing T09 shown in FIG. 57, it becomes a hold display change effect period, and the hold display change common effect as shown in FIG. 56 (H) is executed. After the common display change common effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), the display color changes to green among the specific colors as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold number “1”. The change success production is executed. When the timing T10 shown in FIG. 57 is reached, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display ends. At this time, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the static mode.

  FIG. 58 shows an execution example of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect (icon display change effect) in the case of three pseudo-continuous changes. FIG. 59 shows the execution timing of each effect shown in FIG. At timing T11 shown in FIG. 59, when variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 58 (A) is started, active display in which the display color is green among the specific colors in the active display portion AHA. Shall be performed. Corresponding to this active display, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 or the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 is determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 33, and the hold display change during active display is determined by the process of step S310. A change effect timing pattern including timing is determined. When variable display corresponding to the active display shown in FIG. 58 (A) is started, the storage data corresponding to the hold number “1” is stored in the hold display data storage unit by the processing of step S501 shown in FIG. 47 (A). Is erased (digested). In response to the change effect timing pattern indicated in the stored data erased at this time, it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is during active display. Further, based on the determination that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed by the process of step S504, it is determined that there is “change effect” by the process of step S505, and FIG. 48 is obtained by the process of step S508. The icon display change pattern YDP2-4 shown in (B) is determined.

  At timing T11 shown in FIG. 59, it is determined by the process of step S606 shown in FIG. 40 that a change start command has been received, and the process of step S607 is executed. Thereby, triggered by the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main board 11, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode. Thereafter, for example, in the period from timing T12 to timing T13 shown in FIG. 59, it is determined in the process of step S344 shown in FIG. 51 that it is the active display change effect period, and the process of step S345 is executed. Thereby, the active display change common effect as shown in FIG. 58 (B) can be executed. This active display change common effect is included in the display color change effect, and as shown in FIG. 58C, the display color changes to red among the specific colors as the display mode of the active display. When the timing T14 shown in FIG. 59 is reached, the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped. At this time, the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted from the main board 11. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbol variable display is continuously performed in a variation mode of a constant speed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is maintained in the action mode.

  After the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 58 (C), at the timing T15 shown in FIG. 59, the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted as shown in FIG. Pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period from timing T16 to timing T17 shown in FIG. 59, the active display change effect period is executed according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. This active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode for notifying the message “NEXT”. When the timing T18 shown in FIG. 59 is reached, the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped. At this time, variable display of the small symbols is continuously performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is maintained in the action mode.

  After the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 58 (E), at the timing T19 shown in FIG. 59, the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted as shown in FIG. Pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period from timing T20 to timing T21 shown in FIG. 59, the active display change effect period is executed according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. This active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode for notifying the message “chance”. When the timing T22 shown in FIG. 59 is reached, the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped. At this time, variable display of the small symbols is continuously performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is maintained in the action mode.

  Following the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 58 (G), at the timing T23 shown in FIG. 59, the variable display of the decorative pattern is restarted as shown in FIG. Pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period from timing T24 to timing T25 shown in FIG. 59, the active display change effect period is executed according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. This active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode for notifying a message of “extreme heat”. At timing T26 shown in FIG. 59, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, and reach is established. At this time, it is determined by the process of step S604 shown in FIG. 40 that the display end timing is reached, and the process of step S605 is executed, thereby terminating the display of the effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the change effect character. Thereafter, reach effects are executed in normal reach, super reach, and the like, and when the timing T27 shown in FIG. 59 is reached, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), the big winning combination decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol and is confirmed. May be. At this time, the small symbols are stopped and displayed in response to receiving the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (D), 56 (F), and 56 (I), the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are variable. In the period in which the display result in the display is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 that is the change effect character is the still mode. With the display layer setting as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the effect image showing the character CH1 can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as seen from the player than the effect image showing the decoration design. It is displayed with priority over the effect image shown. By making the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing such a decorative design as a stationary mode, the player can display the decorative design in a variable display. It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived, and to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so that at least one problem in the prior art can be solved. A part of the configuration may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided on the screen of the main image display device 5MA to perform variable display of decorative symbols. In the above description, it is assumed that the small symbol display area 5V is provided and the small symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the small symbol display area 5V is not provided, the effect image indicating the ornament symbol is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5MA. It may be capable of executing variable display of symbols. Even in this case, it is possible to place an effect image indicating a character or the like as a specific effect image at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating an ornamental pattern as an identification information image, and the display result in variable display of the ornamental pattern is In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design may be set as the static mode. Thereby, the misrecognition of the display result in the variable display of a decorative design can be prevented.

  Also, instead of variably displaying the effect image showing the decorative pattern, or by displaying the prepared effect image in an animation together with such variable display, it supports variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. When the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the display that can recognize the display result of the variable display is performed. The display result may be derived separately. In this way, for example, the related display for deriving the display result in relation to the determination result of whether or not to control to the advantageous state advantageous to the player such as the big hit gaming state can be executed, and the front side of the effect image in this related display When the specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode during the period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

  In the above embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” or the notice effect of “active display change” is executed, the character used in the hold display change effect or active display change effect is used as the specific effect image. The effect image shown has been described as being capable of being displayed over a plurality of variable displays. On the other hand, for example, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” and a different look-ahead notice effect different from this can be executed simultaneously over a plurality of variable displays, and characters used in part or all of the pre-reading notice effect are shown. The effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern that becomes the identification information image. In this case, among the effect images used in the pre-reading notice effect, the effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the identification information image is used as the specific effect image, and a display result is derived whether the variable display is being performed. The display mode may be changed to the action mode or the static mode depending on whether the display mode is a period.

  In the said embodiment, as an example of a specific effect image, it demonstrated as the effect image which shows the character used by a hold display change effect and an active display change effect displayed. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, display is started during variable display when variable display of decorative symbols is performed or before the start of variable display, and is continuously displayed even during a period in which the display result in variable display is derived. Any effect image may be used. For example, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state) It may be displayed so that it can also be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating. Alternatively, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is more than an effect image showing a decorative pattern. May also be displayed so as to be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side. In this way, as a specific effect image, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays can be displayed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing a decorative pattern serving as an identification information image. In the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  The effect image indicating the character may be an effect image indicating, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. During variable display in which variable display of decorative symbols or the like is executed, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to the static mode by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the moving image.

  When the effect image indicating one decorative design is an identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating a part of the one decorative image. It may be a thing, and may be arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps ahead rather than the production image which shows the whole of one decoration design. When an effect image showing a plurality of decorative symbols is an identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing some of the decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols It may be arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing all the decorative symbols.

  The type and part of the identification information image on which the effect image that is the specific effect image can be arranged on the front side may be different depending on at least one of the gaming state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state (low probability low base state), the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol is used regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a probabilistic symbol. An effect image that becomes a specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), it overlaps more forward than the effect image showing the normal symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols. While it is possible to place an effect image that becomes a specific effect image at a position, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is not arranged at an overlapping position in front of an effect image that shows a probability variation pattern among a plurality of decorative symbols. May be. In this case, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the player's attention that the probability variation state is derived as a jackpot combination and the probability variation state continues is prevented from being hindered by the display of the specific effect image. This can improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is provided at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol, regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol. It can be placed. On the other hand, when the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special production mode different from the normal production mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, a decorative design with a specific design number associated with a specific person is shown. The effect image that becomes the specific effect image may not be arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image. Thus, the specific effect image may be any image that can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that the display mode is set to the static mode for all the effect images to be the specific effect image during the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, at least a part of the specific effect image arranged at the position overlapping the front side of the effect image of the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image may be set to the static state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side with respect to the effect image indicating the decoration pattern serving as the identification information image in the period in which the display result of the variable display such as the decoration pattern is derived It demonstrated as a thing which makes the display aspect of the production | presentation symbol to become a stationary aspect. On the other hand, when there is an effect image (rear arrangement image) arranged on the rear side of the effect image indicating the decoration pattern that becomes the identification information image, in the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, The rear arrangement image may be displayed in the same display manner as during variable display in which variable display or the like is performed. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer that is assigned a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative design display layer shown in FIG. Also good. An effect image that is a background image is drawn on the background image layer. The Z value may be set so that the background image display layer is arranged on the rearmost side as viewed from the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image serving as the background image arranged at the position overlapping or not overlapping on the rear side of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image The mode may be a display mode similar to that during variable display. As a result, an effect image that may cause misrecognition in the display result, such as a specific effect image, is set to a static mode, while an effect image that does not cause misrecognition of the display result, such as a background image, is displayed in the same manner as during variable display. By setting it as an aspect, the uncomfortable feeling with respect to the display of an effect image can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, during variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is executed, the display mode of the effect image serving as the specific effect image is set as the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived. In the above description, it is assumed that the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged on the front side of the effect image that shows the decorative pattern that is the identification information image is the still image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side with respect to the effect image indicating the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image and The display mode of the produced effect image may be an idling mode different from the static mode. The idling mode may be a temporary stop mode that is set such that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from the action mode in the above-described embodiment within a range in which the display result is not misidentified.

  In addition, during variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is performed, for example, an effect image that informs a message “in design change” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. On the other hand, during the period in which the display result of the decorative symbol variable display or the like is derived, for example, an effect image informing a message of “design confirmed” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. In this way, depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the display result is derived, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific effect image by changing the content of the message that is notified as the character dialogue. Also good.

  When an effect image (character image) showing a character composed of a plurality of parts is displayed as the specific effect image, variable display of decorative symbols is executed during the period in which the display result of variable display is derived. The specific effect image may be displayed in a different display mode.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured as described above. In such a configuration, based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening, the determination result as to whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state and the first state are changed. In relation to at least one of a determination result that the change mode of the time is one of a plurality of modes, or a determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state according to the passing situation of the game ball inside the variable winning device When the related effect for deriving the display result can be executed and the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image in the related display, the display result in the related display is derived in the period The display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it is described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is the second round number (for example, “7 A big hit gaming state having a first round number (for example, “15”) larger than “)” may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display that is displayed after the hold display change effect is executed includes a display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is executed. The display mode of the active display displayed after the change effect is executed has been described as including a display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the hold display change effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display may be configured to include a display mode that is not displayed as the other display mode. . For example, the display mode of the hold display includes a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display, while the display mode of the active display includes the common display mode that can be displayed as the display mode of the hold display. However, a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display may not be provided. Further, the display mode of the active display includes a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display, while the display mode of the hold display includes the common display mode that can be displayed as the display correspondence of the active display. However, a unique display mode that is not displayed as an active display mode may not be provided.

  When the hold display change effect is executed and when the active display change effect is executed, a restriction effect that restricts at least a part of the hold display and the active display may be executed. For example, the limited effect is to display an effect image for display limitation in the display area of the main image display device 5MA, or to be translucent or transparent on the first hold display unit 5HR, the second hold display unit 5HL, or the active display unit AHA. One of the hold display and the active display is displayed by performing display and reduction display, or concealing the hold display and the active display when the production model (movable member) is moved from the retracted state to the advanced state and is in the advanced state. What is necessary is just to restrict the part or the whole so that the player cannot see or difficult to see.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the process of step S242 shown in FIG. 26 includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. It has been described that it is established and controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a big winning opening (second large winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The probability winning attacker's big prize opening (second big prize opening) can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed during variable display of the special symbol. Is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or maintains the light off state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) resulting in a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating “−” (lighting) is displayed. It may be configured such that other numbers and symbols are not displayed by repeating the non-display (off). As a special symbol variable display result, a symbol indicating “−” is not stopped and displayed as a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating “1” to “9” and other symbols. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, as a variable display result, symbols that are not stopped are switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” and “probability” at which various decisions are made may be 0% (not decided) or 100% (not necessarily decided), such as 70:30, for example. So that the possibility of at least one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, the ratio of the determination result of any one of the plurality of determination results is higher than the ratio of the determination result of other determination results. It may be included to be 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. It will be higher than the ratio.

  In the above embodiment, one change pattern designation command is transmitted when variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative design, and the like. Although an example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notification is made by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. The command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode before the so-called second stop is transmitted, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of a redrawing effect (reach and reach). If not, a command indicating a variable display time or a variable display mode after the so-called second stop may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 120 selects a specific variable display mode executed at each timing. You may make it perform. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after the first command is sent, after a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be transmitted. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above, an example is shown in which the main side performs a prefetch determination and a command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side. However, a command indicating a random number value is transmitted from the main side and a prefetch determination is performed on the sub side. You may make it do.

  The present invention is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and that can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, and a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be distinguished from each other ( The display result of a plurality of reels, for example, is derived and displayed, and one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.) Is a gaming machine that can be generated. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine and the software for performing a predetermined process cooperate with each other to display the pachinko shown in the above embodiment. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part of the characteristics which the gaming machine 1 has may be provided. Specifically, the display result in the variable display of the identification information is derived in the configuration in which the specific effect can be executed at the overlapping position on the front side of the display surface on which the design of the identification information is variably displayed. In a period that overlaps in front of the identification information, the effect mode of the specific effect may be different from the effect mode during the variable display, for example, the still mode or the temporary stop mode. .

  In addition, various effects including device configuration and data configuration of gaming machine, processing shown in flowchart, image display operation in image display device, sound output operation in speaker, and lighting operation in game effect lamp and decoration LED The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives Slot machines are not limited to those where bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, but only slot machines that set betting numbers using gaming balls as gaming values, or only credits as gaming values. It may be a full credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, but for example, a plurality of types of medals and gaming balls. The game value may be used together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting the number of bets using any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals and game balls can be played by winning. Any of the types of gaming value may be paid out.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

(1-1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above includes an adjustment unit realized by the CPU 130 of the production control microcomputer 120 in cooperation with each unit, and an adjustment image display unit. The adjustment means can adjust the effect in accordance with the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least during execution of the variable display. The adjustment image display means can adjust the adjustment result image R () corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means. An example of the adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined period T1. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R not visible during the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. Since it did in this way, the fall of the recognition property of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  In the above, an example in which the volume can be adjusted has been described. However, the adjustable effect may be the display brightness of the main image display device 5MA or the like as described above. Further, the adjustable effect may be at least one of volume and brightness (that is, both volume and brightness may be adjustable). The adjustment image may be displayed not only when the volume is changed by the adjustment operation, but also when the volume is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible in the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a translucent manner or blinking in the derivation display period T2. It may be difficult to view. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In this case, for example, a process of displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-view manner is executed instead of step S712 in FIG. 42, and the display is returned from the difficult-to-view manner in step S715 (within a predetermined period T1). The effect effect setting process may be modified and configured such that the adjusted image is restored.

(1-2) When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means displays the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjustment image may be displayed at a position that is not superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P, and the adjustment image is not visible. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. Moreover, since the adjustment image can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of information displayed on the main image display device 5MA.
Note that the specific effect image displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P, the development notification image (see FIG. 53B), but also the image indicating the character CH1 or the above-described fourth design. Or an image showing a hold display.

(1-3) When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means displays the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjustment means may not adjust the rendering effect related to the error notification. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, the error sound and the display brightness of the error image can be kept at the specified value, so that it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error despite the occurrence of some error. .
The effects related to error notification not adjusted by the adjusting means include not only the error volume but also the luminance (light quantity) when the error image is displayed, and lamps that light up when an error occurs (the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame). The brightness of the frame LED 9c and the like may be used.

(2) Further, at least part of the display area of the adjusted image may overlap with at least part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 43A). In this way, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result.
The derived display area of the variable display result in which at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps is not limited to the decorative design display area Ar (see FIG. 43A), and a variable display of the effect image showing the small design is possible. It may be a small symbol display area 5V where the display result is derived.

(3) Further, the error image may not be deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 43 (D2)). In this way, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(4) The display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment image (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that has received the abnormality notification command in step S57 eliminates the error indicated by the command). Until that time, the display of the error image as shown in FIGS. 43D1 and 43D2 may be continued). Even in this case, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(5) When the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is maintained to be visible (for example, see FIG. 43B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is deleted (for example, effect control). The CPU 130 of the microcomputer 120 may execute the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662). By doing so, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

(6) Further, specific effect execution means capable of displaying a specific effect image during execution of variable display of identification information (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the change effect character display process in step S162). The specific effect image can be arranged at a position overlapping at least ahead of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 41B), and the specific effect execution means derives the variable information display result of the identification information. The display mode of the specific effect image is set to a static mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information during the period (for example, a portion where the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes the process of step S609) ). In this way, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  In addition, the gaming machine is smaller than the first area where the identification information image is displayed (for example, the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.). In a region (for example, the small symbol display area 5V), a constant display means (for example, steps S325 and S350) that performs variable display of the notification information image and derives the display result in synchronization with variable display of the identification information image is executed. The CPU 130 of the production control microcomputer 120 may be provided. In such a configuration, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  Further, information output means (for example, step S266 of step S266) that outputs display control information (for example, a first variation start command, a second variation start command, etc.) that can specify that variable display is started according to the determination result of the determination unit. And the effect execution means may set the display mode of the specific effect image to a non-stationary mode (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs stepping) upon reception of display control information. A part for executing the processing of S607). By doing so, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result while suppressing the uncomfortable feeling of the specific performance.

  Also, corresponding display means (for example, active display section AHA) capable of executing corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information image during execution of variable display of the identification information image, has been started yet. Hold display means (for example, the first start winning storage display area 5HR, the second start winning storage display area 5HL, etc.) for holding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information image that has not been changed, and the display mode of the hold display are changed. The first change effect means (for example, the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the process of step S343) capable of executing one change effect (for example, the hold display change effect), and the display mode of the corresponding display are changed. Second change effect means (for example, step S345) capable of executing two change effects (for example, icon display change effects). The display mode of the hold display displayed after the first change effect is executed is the display of the corresponding display after the second change effect is executed. A special mode that is not displayed as the display mode (for example, display of “secret”) may be included. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display result from being misidentified while enabling execution of the first change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to the special mode.

  Further, the display mode of the correspondence display displayed after the second change effect is executed is a special mode (for example, “chance” or “chance” that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the first change effect is executed. "NEXT", "Intense heat", etc.) may be included. In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the second change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display to the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the display result from being misidentified.

  In addition, the specific effect image can be disposed at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information image (see, for example, FIG. 41B), and the specific effect execution means includes the identification information. In a period in which an image display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production while preventing misperception of the display result.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention. For example, the present invention does not have to include all the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above (1-1) to (1-3) and (2) to (6), and achieves the object. If possible, deletion or addition of components is optional. For example, the period during which the adjustment image is not visible or difficult to visually recognize is not limited to the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjustment image may be invisible or difficult to view in a reach action (for example, during full rotation). In other words, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized may be a predetermined period during which the target to be recognized by the player is notified. Further, the adjustment image may be displayed at a position where it is superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Further, the effect related to error notification may be adjustable by the adjusting means. In addition, the display area of the adjustment image may not overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5MA Main image display device 5 SU Sub image display device R Adjustment result image P Operation promotion image Ar Display area of decoration symbol 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9a Sky frame LED
9b Left frame LED
9c Right frame LED
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Main board 12 Production control board 16A Production control relay board 16B Drive control board 16C-16F Light emitter control board 51-54 Movable member 60A-60C Operation motor 61 Movable member position sensor 71-74 Light emitter unit 100 For game control Microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Production control microcomputer 121 ROM
123A to 123C Production data memory 130 CPU
140 VDP
411, 413a to 413c Light emitter driver 412 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminals

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display,
Control means for controlling electrical components;
An output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means;
Adjustment means capable of adjusting the effect of the effect according to the adjustment operation by the player at least during execution of variable display;
Adjustment image display means for displaying an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period,
The output means includes
It has a stop function to stop the output of a specific signal after a specific period has elapsed since the control signal was input,
The stop function can be enabled or disabled,
The output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means includes a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a second output state in which the waveform rises in a gradual change manner than the first output state. Can be set to one of the output states of
When the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize the adjustment image in the period during which the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by difficulty in visual recognition. Control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.